Chevrolet 1997 Astro Passenger Owner's Manual

The 1997 Chevrolet Astro Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR’ system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3- 1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5- 1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10.
9- 1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want t o read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
n
n
1-
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name ASTRO are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
C97 10 B First Edition
ii
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institutefor
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propri6taires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guideen frarqais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T lC7
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the featuresand
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index
in back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
’A
CAUTION:
These mean thereis something thatcould hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others couldbe hurt.
iii
You will also finda circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this,” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
I NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
PROTECT
EVES BY
SHIELDING
UNLOCK
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
Esl
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
COOLANT
TEMP
6e
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
--
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
FUSE
LIGHTER
(0)
)a(
R.
b
HORN
BRAKE
SPEAKER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
POWER
WINDOW
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
,111,
FOG LAMPS
$0
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
I
m
w,
FUEL
e3
(@)
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Cargo Van
vi
Passenger Van
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information aboutthe seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some thingsyou should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-12
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-26
1-27
1-27
1-34
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR)
System
Rear Seat Passengers
1-37
1-39
1-41
1-44
1-53
1-62
1-65
1-65
1-66
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guidesfor
Children and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
(Bench Seat)
Children
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a
Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, take them out and put them back in. It also tells
you about bucket and bench seats, power seats and
head restraints.
2-Way Front Seat
The bucket seats can be
adjusted forward or
rearward by the lever at the
front of the seat.
Mant-1 Front Seats
You can lose control of the v icle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Move the seat adjustment lever at the front of the seat
toward the driver’s door to unlock it. Slide the seat to
where you want it. Then release the lever and try to
move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is
locked into place.
Manual Lumbar Support(If Equipped)
Power Seats (If Equipped)
If you have this feature, there willbe a control pad on the
inboard side of the driver and passenger bucket seats.
If you have this feature,there will be a knob on the
inboard sideof the driver and passenger bucket seats.
Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase
lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rearof the
vehicle to decreaselumbar support.
The front controlmakes the front of the seat go up
and down.
The rear controlmakes the rear of the seat go up
and down.
The center control makes the whole seat go forward,
rearward, up or down.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
There isa lever on the insideof the seatto adjust the seatback.
You can adjustthe seatback
by lifting the lever. Release
the lever to lock the seatback
where you want it. Pull up
on the lever and the seatwill
go to an upright position.
But don’t havea seatback reclinedif your vehicleis moving.
~
Sitting ina reclined position when your vehicle
is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-4
Head Restraints
Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable
I
on others. Slidean adjustable head restraint up or down
up, your safety belts can’t do
their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then well
sit
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of
your ears. Thisposition reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.
Seatback Latches (Non-Touring
Bench Seats)
The seatback lever is on the right rear of your seat.
To fold your non-touring
seatback forward,pull up on
the latch release lever while
pulling the seatback toward
the rear of the vehicle.
After the latch has been released, push the seatback
toward the front of the vehicle until it locks in place. To
raise the seatback, unlock the seatback latch by pushing
up on the lever while pushing down on the upper edge
of the seatback. Move the seatback into the upright
position. Make sure the seatback islocked when it is
bacl 1 th lpright position.
A CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury tothe person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-6
Rear Seats
A CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t lockedinto place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.
A CAUTION:
-
I
A safety beltthat is twistedor not properly
attached won’t provide the protection needed ina
crash. The person wearingthe belt couldbe
seriously injured. After installingthe seat, always
check to be sure thatthe safety beltsare not
twisted and areproperly attached.
Bucket Seats
If you have rear bucket seats in your vehicle, they will
recline and adjust the same way as the front manual
in this
bucket seats. See “Reclining Seatbacks” earlier
section or in the Index.
Bench Seats
If you have bench seats in your vehicle, each seat can
carry up to three passengers.They can also be removed
to increase storage space.
The centerbench (if not equipped with a built-in child
restraint) and rear bench seats can be adjusted forward
or rearward by the lever at the front of the seat.
Move the seat adjustment
lever at the front of the seat
toward the passenger’s side
to unlock it. Slide the seat to
where you want it. Then
release the lever and try to
move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat
is locked into place.
The non-touring center bench seat has a pivoting
right armrest. The left armrest can also be used as a
storage compartment.
The optional touring bench seats come with moveable
armrests, individual reclining seatbacks, adjustable
headrests and a fold-down center console.
1-7
To raise or lower the center
console, press the button
between the beverage
holders. Only sit in the
center seating position
when the console is in an
upright position.
i
To adjust your seatback, pull up on the lever on the
lower outside of the seat.
The center bench seatbacks will recline further back
than the rear bench seatbacks.
1-8
For details about headrests, see “Head Restraints” in
this section.
Removing the Rear Seats
To remove the rear seats, do the following:
c
1. If you are removing the
center seat, remove the
right lap-shoulder belt.
I TO
DETACH
1‘
BELT FOR \
To do this, press the tip
SEAT REMOVAL\
of a key into the release
hole of the safety belt
attachment while pulling
up on the safety belt.
INSERT KEY 1
INTO HOLE
AND PUSH II
-9.-
I
,
I
1
2. If you have a safety belt
guide onyour seat, pull
the safety belt all the way
I, outthroughtheguide.
I
3. Pull up on the seatback latch on the right rear of the
front seat. Push the seatbackdown until it locks in
place (non-touring bench seats only).
1-9
4. Lift up on the left seat releaselever, then the right.
The latchesare near the floor on the rear legs of
the seat.
5. Lift up on the rear of the seat to remove the seat
assembly from the rear latch pins. Then, pull back
and lift the seat out of the vehicle.
Your seat release latch lever is sprung with a
two-stage mechanism. To fully release the latch, two
levels of lift effort will be required. First, a low effort
to overcome the first stage and then a moderate
effort to fully release the latch.
1-10
Replacing the Rear Seats
To replace the rear seats, do the following:
2. Pull the seatdown to latch the rear retainers. Make
sure the seat is locked in by pulling up and down on
the seat.
1 . Lower the seat into position. Make sure the front
retainers are hooked onto the anchor pins.
3. Raise the seatback by pushing forward on the latch at
the right rear of the seat, while pushing down on the
upper edge of the seatback. Pull up on the seatback
until it is locked securelyin the up position.
1-11
4. If you are replacing the center seat, connectthe right
lap-shoulder belt to the attachment on the seat
cushion. If you have a safety belt guide on your seat,
pull the belt through the guide before reattaching the
lap-shoulder belt to the side of the seat. The release
hole should be facing outward.
If you installed the safety belt with the release hole
facing inward (toward the seat), slide the plastic
cover up so you can seethe buckle. Disconnect the
seat belt. Slide the cover back down and reinstall the
belt correctly.
NOTICE:
Be sure to put the correct seats back in the proper
positions so the safety beltswill work properly.
1-12
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), or air bag system.
Don’t let anyone ride whel he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries
can be muchworse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash,you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
I A CALION:
It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in theseareas aremore likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as areminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index .)
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes aremild, and some crashes canbe so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts areclear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
1-13
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat
on wheels.
1-14
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-15
L
or the instrument panel ...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces.That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Here Are Questions Many PeopleAsk Q.’ If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
Q.’ Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if
you are belted.
Q.’ If my vehicle has air bags, why should I haveto
wear safety belts?
A:
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 kmh).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has
required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle upto get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly
“i
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller
children and babies.If a child will be ridingin your
vehicle, see thepart of this manual called “Children.”
Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describesthe driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-18
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’dbe less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go
of the
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safetybelt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-19
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move it down, push in at the top of the arrows and
move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing in to make
sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portionof the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling
off your shoulder.
1-20
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
'A
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-21
&:
What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
You can be seriously injuredif your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like
this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
What's wrong with this?
I
A:
l
l
l,--L-/
!
/II CAI, LION:
-.I
I
-
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt goes
over an armrestlike this.The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied
at the
abdomen, notat the pelvic bones,and thatcould
cause seriousor fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
@
What's wrong with this?
'
I
'
,
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm.In a crash, your
body would move too far forward,which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
bones.
ribs, which aren't as strong as shoulder
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.
e.’
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt.In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.
If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
your dealerto fix it.
I
A:
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-26
The bestway to protect the fetus
is to protect the
mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus
won’t be hurtin a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the
key to malung
safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s
safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safetybelt. See “Driver Position”
earlier in this section.
When the lap belt
is ,pulled out all the
way, it will lock.
If it does, letit go back all theway and start again.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
This part explains the Supplemental InflatableRestraint
(SIR) system or air bag system.
Your vehicle has two air bags -- one air bag for the
driver and another airbag for the right frontpassenger.
You can be severelyinjured or’killedin a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety..belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safetybelt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejec‘tedfrom it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety
belts. All air bags are designetkto work with
safety belts,but don’t replace them. Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyonein your vehicle should weara
safety beltproperly whether or not there’s an
air bag for thatperson.
--
--
Here are themost important things to know about the air
bag system:
-
-
-
-
-
1-27
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument panel,
which shows AIR BAG.
A CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with
great force, faster thanthe
blink of an eye. If you’retoo close to an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position beforeand duringa
crash. Always wearyour safety belt, even withair
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.
’ A CAUTION:
An inflating air bag can seriously injure small
children. Alwayssecure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children”and the caution label onthe
right front passenger’s safety belt.
1-28
AIR
BAG
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How the Air Bag System Works
I
The right front passenger’s air
bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the airbags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middleof the steering wheel.
1-29
If something is between
an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might notinflate properly or it
might forcethe object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or nearany other air
bag covering. And don’thang anything from the
assist handle on the passenger’s sideof the
instrument panel.
When shouldan airbag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflatein a moderate to severe
frontal ornear-frontal crash. The airbag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, thethreshold level is
about 1 1 to 16 mph ( 1 8 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
1-30
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impactand
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an airbag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers arelease of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the
instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts.Air bags distribute the forceof
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Butair bags would
not help youin many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward thoseair bags. Air
bags should neverbe regarded as a n w g more than a
supplement to safetybelts, and then onlyin moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see afteran air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly
that some people may not even realize theair bag
inflated. Some componentsof the airbag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air
bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag -- will behot for a short time. The partsof the
bag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There
will be some smokeand
dust coming fromvents in the deflated airbags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeingfrom
or
being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there
is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma
or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon asisitsafe to doso.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or
door.
0
Air bags are designed to inflate
only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts foryour air bag
system. If you don’t get them, theair bag system
won’t be there to help protectyou in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. Theservice manual foryour
vehicle covers theneed to replace otherparts.
0
Your vehicle is equippedwith a crashsensing and
diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system. The module records
information aboutthe readiness of the system,
when the sensors areactivated and driver’s safety
belt usage at deployment.
1-31
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper servicecan mean that your air bag
for service.
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
NOTICE:
~
~
~~~
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module inthe steering wheel or both the air
bag moduleand the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not openor
break the air bag coverings.
Ia
CAUTION:
For up to10 minutes after theignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air
bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of
the air bag system.Be sure to follow proper
service procedures,and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified todo so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
1-32
Adding Equipment toYour Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
@
@
Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the
air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, frontend sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistancebefore you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this
manual. See “Customer SatisfactionProcedure” in
the Index.)
A:
If I add a push bumper or
a bicycle rack to the
front ofmy vehicle, will it keep the
air bags
from working properly?
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached toyour vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
1-33
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
These positions have lap-shoulder belts, Here’s how to
wear one properly.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside PassengerPositions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let itget twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-34
d
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle,tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until
you can buckleit.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
3. To make the lappart tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the beltas you pull up on the shoulder part.
If the beltis not long enough, see“Safety Belt
Extender” at the end
of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-35
You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
The lap part of the belt shouldbe worn low and snugon
the hips,just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you'dbe less likely
to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop ora crash.
1-36
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This featurewill provide added safety belt
comfort for childrenwho have outgrown child restraints
and for small adults. When installedon a shoulderbelt,
the comfort guide pulls the
belt away from the neck
and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in
the rear seats. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints
and for
smaller adults,the comfort guidesmay be installed on
the shoulder belts.Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safetybelt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of
the seatback.
I
1-37
I
I
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-38
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cordmust be under the belt and the guide
on top.
Center Passenger Position
(Bench Seat)
Lap Belt
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside PassengerPositions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
If your vehicle has rear bench seats, someonecan sit in
the center positions.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges togetherso that you can take them out from
the guides. Slidethe guide ontothe storage clip.
1-39
II
c
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it alongthe belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-40
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! Thatincludes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian provincesays children up to some agemust be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Childrenand Babies
(Except Cargo Vans)
r Smaller
- children and babies si
I
1
i
dd always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt mightnot stay low on the hips, asit
should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe
child’s abdomen.In a crash,the belt wouldapply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enoughfor one is alwaysproperly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-41
at only 25mph (40 kmk), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 2404b.(110 kg) force on
your arms. The babywould be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby inan infant restraint.
-
-
-
Never holda baby inyour arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh much until a
crash. During acrash a babywill become so
heavy you can't hold it. For example, in acrash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-42
Smaller Children andBabies (Cargo Vans)
I
4CAUTION:
A very young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt mightnot stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely beover the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatalinjuries. Smaller children
and babies should always berestrained in a child
restraint. However, infants, who should be
restrained in a rearfacing child restraint, cannot
ride safely in this vehicle. The instructions for the
restraint will say whether it is the right type and
size for your child. If a forward-facingchild
restraint is suitable for yourchild, besure the
child is alwaysproperly restrained while riding in
this vehicle.
l A
A CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash ababy will become so
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-43
Built-in Child Restraint (Option)
heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in a crash
at only25 mph (40 kmk), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-1b.
(110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
If your vehicle has this option, there’s a built-in child
restraint at each outboard position of the second row
bench seat.
1-44
This child restraint system conforms
to all applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Each child restraint is designed for use only by children
who weigh between 22 and 60 pounds (10 and 27 kg)
and whose height is between 33.5 and 5 1 inches (850 and
1 295 mm) and who are capable of sitting upright alone.
The child should also be at least one
year old. It is
important to use a rear-facing infant restraintuntil the
child is about ayear old. A rear-facing restraint gives
the infant’s head, neck and body the supportthey would
need in a crash. See“Child Restraints” laterin this
section formore information.
@
What if the topof my child’s shouldersis above
the shoulder beltslots for the five-point child
restraint harness system?
A:
A child whose shoulders are above the shoulder
BEFORE YOU USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT,
BE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S
SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS THAT
THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. IF A
CHILD WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE
THOSE SLOTS USES THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT, THE CHILD COULD BE
INJURED DURINGA SUDDEN STOP OR
CRASH. IF THE TOPOF THE CHILD’S
SHOULDERS IS ABOVE THE SLOTS, DON’T
USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT WHILE THE
VEHICLE IS IN MOTION.
belt slots for the five-point child restraint
harness
system shouldn’tuse the harness. Instead,the child
should siton the vehicle’s regular seat cushionand
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts.
1-45
Securing a Child in the Built-in
Child Restraint
I
-
-
-
You’ll be using the child restraint’s harness(A) to
secure your child. Don’t use the vehicle’s safety belts.
1. Lower the child restraint cushion.
1-46
i’
I
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts on a child
seated on the child restraint cushion can cause
serious injury tothe child in a sudden stop or
crash. If a child isthe propersize for the built-in
child restraint, secure the child using the child
restraint’s harness. But children who are too
large forthe built-in child restraint should sit on
the vehicle’s regular seat and use the regular
safety belts.
WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE
USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKINGTHE
VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURINGA SUDDEN
STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUST THE
BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD
RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD.
2. If the left and right halves of the shoulderharness
clip are fastened
together, separate them.
3. Place the child on the child restraintcushion.
1-47
6. With the other side of the harness, pull the shoulder
part of the harness out in a single motion and place
the harness over the child’s shoulder. If the belt stops
before the latch plate reaches the buckle, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
7. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Select only one sideof the harness. In a single motion,
pull the shoulder part of the harness out, and place
the
harness over the child’s shoulder.If the belt stops
before the latch plate reaches the buckle, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
5. Push the latch plate(B) into the buckle until it clicks.
Be sure the buckle is free of any foreign objects that
may prevent you from securing the latch plates.If
you can’t secure a latch plate, see your GM dealer
for service before using the child restraint.
1-48
8. Pull up on both latch plates to make sure they
are secure.
I ACAUTION:
An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t help
1 keep the harness in place on the child’s shoulders.
If the harnessisn’t on the child’s shoulders, it
won’t be able to restrainthe child’s upper body
in a sudden stop orcrash. The child could be
seriously injured. Make sure the harness clip is
properly fastened.
9. Now fasten the leftand right halves of the shoulder
harness clip together. The purposeof this clip is to help
keep the harness positioned on the child’s shoulders.
1-49
10. Pull up on both shoulder harnesses totighten the lap
parts of the harness.
11. Adjust the position of the harness on the child’s
shoulders by moving the clip up or down along the
harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder
part should be centered near the child’s shoulder.
The harness should be away from the child’s face
and neck, but not falling from the child’s shoulders.
If you expect that the child will sleep while riding, you
can recline the seatback. See “Seats” in the Index.
1-50
Removing the Childfrom the Built-in
Child Restraint
2. Unlatch the harness by pus lhing the button on
the buckle.
1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip.
3. Move one sideof the harness off the child’s shoulder.
4. Move theother side of the harnessoff the
child’s shoulder.
5. Remove the child fromthe child restraint cushion.
1-51
Storing the Built-in Child Restraint
Always properly store the built-in child restraint before
using the vehicle’s lap-shoulder belt.
1. Fasten the harness clip, but leave the harness unbuckled.
..
4. Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback, and
secure it by pressing the upper corners against the
fastener stripson the seatback.
2. Fold the child restraint cushion and leg rest up into
the seatback.
3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback.
1-52
Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle, your
built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked
and may need to have parts replaced after a crash. See
“Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat
and Restraint System Parts After a Crash” in the Index.
Child Restraints
Be sure the child restraintis designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label sayingthat it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may
find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints
use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child alsohas to be secured within
the restraint tohelp reduce the chanceof personal injury.
The instructionsthat come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that.
Where toPut the Restraint
(Except Cargo Vans)
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they
are restrained in the rear ratherthan the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommendthat you put your
child restraintin a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraintin the front passenger seat.
Here’s why:
A child ina rearfacing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is becausethe back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be very closeto
the inflating air bag. Always secure a rearfacing
child restraint in a rear seat.
You may, however,secure a forward-facingchild
restraint in the right front seat. Beforeyou secure
a forward-facingchild restraint, always movethe
front passenger seat as farback as it will go. Or,
secure the child restraint in a rearseat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
-estraintproperly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove
around in a collision orsudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-53
Where to Put the Restraint (CargoVans)
Top Strap
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraintin
this vehicle. Here’s why:
A child in a rearfacing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the passenger’s air bag
inflates. This is becausethe back of a rearfacing
child restraint would be very closeto the inflating
air bag. Do not use a rearfacing child restraint in
this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always movethe passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move
around in a collision orsudden stop and injurepeople in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-54
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want
to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you
how to do it.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. Seethe earlier part
about thetop strap if the child restrainthas one.
1. Put the restraint on theseat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraintas the
instructions say.
Tilt the latchplate to adjust thebelt if needed. If the
shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck,
put it behind the child restraint.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap
and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-55
I
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on thechild restraint.
6 . Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, justunbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat
Position (Bench Seat)
You'll be using the lap belt.
See the earlier part about
the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long aspossible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2 . Put the restraint on the seat.Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Run the vehicle's safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-57
5 . Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its freeend while you push
down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure. If‘it isn’t, secure the
restraint in a different place in the vehicle and
contact the child restraint
maker for theiradvice
about how to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, justunbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
I /\ CAUTION:
’
~
Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag.Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the front passenger’s air bag
inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be very close tothe inflating
air bag. If your vehicle is a passenger van, always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle isa cargo van, do not usea
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. If a
forward-facing child restraint is suitable for your
child, always movethe passenger seat as far back
as it will go.
1-59
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has a front passenger air bag,
always move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing a forward-facing child restraint, (See
“Seats’’ in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-60
a
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
6. Pull the rest of the lap belt all theway out of the
retractor toset the lock.
7. To tighten the belt, feed the lapbelt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure itis secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-61
Larger Children
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulderbelt and
get the additional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children aresafer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
0
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-62
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
-I
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only oneperson at a time.
&.” What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is
very closeto the child’s faceor neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that beltsprovide. If the
child is sittingin a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear SafetyBelt Comfort Guides” in the Index. If
the child is so small that the shoulderbelt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to placethe child in a seatthat has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
1-63
Never do this.
Here a child issitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wearsthe belt inthis way, in
a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen.That could causeserious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap
portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-64
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should useit.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, takethe heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for theseat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, justattach it
to the regular safetybelt.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get anew one right away.
If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or
frayed harness strapscan rip apartunder impact forces
just like torn or frayed safety belts can. They may not
protect a child in a crash.If a harness strapis torn or
frayed, get a new harness right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a
built-in child restraint, alsoperiodically make sure the
harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, retractorsand
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint
system parts. If you see anything thatmight keep a
safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing
its job,have it repaired.
1-65
Replacing Restraint SystemParts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new safety belts or
built-in child restraint parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
straps were stretched, as they would be if worn during a
more severe crash, then you need new safety belts or
harness straps.
If you ever see alabel on a right front safety belt that
says to replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new
belt will be there to help protect you in a collision. You
would see this label on the belt near the latch plate.
If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps
are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also
may mean you will need to have safety belt, built-in
child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt
or built-in child restraint wasn’t being used at the time
of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
1-66
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional featureson your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained arethe instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-4
2- 6
2-7
2- 10
2- 12
2- 14
2- 15
2-15
2- 17
2-1 8
2- 19
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-26
Keys
Front Doors
Rear Doors
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System
Sliding Door
Hatch
Theft
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Locking Rear Axle
All-Wheel Drive (Option)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-3 1
2-37
2-39
2-4 1
2-42
2-50
2-5 1
2-52
2-53
2-56
2-58
2-60
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
Horn
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Sun Visors
Accessory Power Outlets (Option)
Universal Transmitter (Option)
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-1
Keys
A CAUTION:
--I
Leaving
young
children
a vehicle with
in
the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t
leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.
I
‘ C L ’
2-2
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks. It
will fit with either side up.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your dealer
or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep
this tag in a safeplace. If you lose your keys, you’ll be
able to have new ones made easily using this tag.
I NOTICE:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the
owner with a pair of identical keys and a bar-coded tag.
Your vehicle hasa number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have
a lot
of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside.You may even haveto
damage your vehicle to get in.
So be sure you
have extra keys.
2-3
Front Doors
Rear Doors
To open the front sidedoor from the outside, graspthe
handle and pull the door open.
If you have the Dutch doors, you must open the
hatch first.
To open the front side door
from the inside, pull the
lever toward you and push
the door open.
2-4
C
I
To open the rear doors
from the outside, open the
passenger’s side rear door
first. Grasp the handle and
pull the door open.
To open the driver’s side
rear door,pull on the latch
release handle in the inside
of the door.
To fully open the rear doors,
push in on the clip and lift
the check assembly up off
the mounting bracket.
To close the rear doors, closethe driver’s side door first.
Check to make sure both doors are completely closed.
Do this on each door. Replace the check assemblies on
the mounting brackets before closing the doors.
The rear doors have a check assembly to keep the doors
from opening beyond 90”.
See the Caution following “Swing-Out Windows” in
this section.
2-5
Door Locks
There are severalways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock your door from the outside,use your key.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easilyenter through an unlocked
door when you slow downor stop your vehicle.
This may not be
so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will befar
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
--
2-6
--
To lock the front doors and
sliding side door from the
inside, slidethe lock levers
down. To unlock the front
doors and the sliding side
door from the inside, slide
the lock levers up.
Rear doors cannotbe manually locked from the inside.
To unlock the rear hatch and Dutch doors from the
inside, press the REAR HATCH button located to the
right of the shift lever.
Power Door LC ’--(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has power
door locks,press the power
door lock switch to lock or
unlock all the doors at once.
All models have overriding door locks. When a door is
locked, the door handle will not work the latch. This
will help stop a doorfrom being accidentally opened.
However, power door locks do not affect the operation
of the hatch.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, takeyour keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Keyless Entry System
The power door lock switch will not lock or unlock the
rear hatch and Dutch doors. You must use the REAR
HATCH button. See “Rear Hatch and Dutch Doors
Release” in this section.
Every vehicle with power door locks has a pulse lock
system. A pulse lock system works like this:
If the sliding door is open and you press the power door
lock switch, the sliding doorwill not lock immediately.
After you close the door, the system comes on and, in
about five seconds,locks the sliding door.
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and
unlock your doors orunlock your rear hatch from about
3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry and Science
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject tothe following twoconditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
2-7
This devicecomplies with RSS-210 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decreasein
range. This is normal for any remote lock control
system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have
to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronization is necessary. See
the instructions that follow.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
If you’re still having trouble, see your GM dealer or
a qualified technician for service.
2-8
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operation
When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s door will
unlock automatically. If you press UNLOCK again
within five seconds, all doors will unlock. All doors
will lock when LOCK is pressed. The interior lamps
will come on whenever you lock or unlock the doors.
See “Keyless Illumination’’ in the Index. Pressing
REAR 2X twice within three seconds, will unlock the
hatch or rear cargo doors.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
’
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters
matched to it.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close toyour vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
Use one Panasonic@ three volt, type CR2032, or
equivalent battery.
Your transmitter housing snaps apart for ease in
battery replacement.
1. Insert a small coin, or flathead screwdriver, to
separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with a new one,
making sure the positive side (+) side of the battery
is facing down.
3. Snap the top and bottom together.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try
synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.
2-9
Synchronization
Sliding Door
Synchronization may be necessary due tothe security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal ithas been sent previously.
This will prevent anyone from recording and playing
back the signal from the transmitter.
'
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for eight
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
To open the sliding side door, pull the handle toward the
back and slide the door to the rear until it rests in the
open detent position.
To close the sliding side door, you must first pull the
door past the open detent position.
2-10
Sliding Door Child SecurityLock
Your vehicle’s sliding side dooris equipped with a
child security door lock, located at the front of the
sliding door.
There are two labels on your vehicle to remind you that
you have this feature. One can be seen from the outside
on your sliding door. It is located near the bottom of the
door glass, toward the front of the door.
r
A
~
The other label is at the
front of the sliding door,
near the child security
door lock.
UTION:
If your vehicle is facing downward ona steep grade
(15 percent or more), the door may notstay open
and could slam shut, possiblyinjuring someone. To
make sure the door does not slam shut, sure
be to
hold it open until everyone is clear
of the door,and
only then allow it to slowly close.
This feature prevents passengers from opening the
sliding side doorfrom the inside.
2-11
To use this feature, do the following:
Hatch
1. Move the lever all the way up.
2. Close the door.
To open the sliding side door while the child security
lock is engaged,unlock the door and open it from
the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able toopen
the slidingdoor from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how the security door lock
works, and how to cancel the lock.
Canceling the SlidingDoor Child
Security Lock
To cancel the child security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
2-12
It canbe danL ‘ous to drive with therear
swing-out windows, rear hatch or rear doors
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death
If you must drivewith the rear swing-out
windows, rear hatch or rear doors openif or
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through theseal between the body and the
rear swing-out windows, rear hatch or rear doors:
Make sure all windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on anything butMAX A/C. That will force
outside air into your
vehicle. See“Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
If you have air outletson or under the
instrument panel, open themall the way.
See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.
Rear Hatch and DutchDoors Release
(Option)
If you have this option,your vehicle must be in either
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to release the hatch and
unlock the Dutch doors. If your battery is dead, the
hatch and Dutch doors will not open, even from the
outside with a key.
I
To release the hatch and
unlock the doors from the
inside of the vehicle, press
the REAR HATCH button
on the instrument panel.
To release the hatch using the optional Keyless Entry
hand-held transmitter, see “Keyless Entry System” in
the Index.
To release the hatch and
unlock the doors from the
outside of the vehicle, put
the key in the lock and
turn clockwise.
Then, pull up on the hatch and open the right rear door
first. Grasp the handle and pull the door open.
The hatch and doors will automatically lock when the
hatch is shut.
It is located on the right side of the steering column. The
hatch will release with or without the key in the ignition.
Then, pull up on the hatch handle and open the doors.
If the hatch is partially closed, the rear doors will lock
and you will need to use the key or the REAR HATCH
button to unlock them.
Also, see the Caution following “Hatch,”located in
this section.
2-13
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in sbme cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible tosteal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s
door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your
key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do
this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will
your ignition and transmission. And remember to lock
the doors.
2-14
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your key.
But what if you have to leave your key? What if you
have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Use your ignition key to stan your vehicle. The
ignition key lets you turn the ignition switch to five
different positions.
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
0 Keep your speed at
55 mph (SS km/h) or
less for thefirst 500 miles (SO5 km).
0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (SO5 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get newbrake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See
“Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for more
information.
--
Ignition Positior--
C
--
ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. To get into ACCESSORY, push in the key
and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain
locked, just as it was before you inserted the key.
2-15
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
NOTICE:
Don’t operate accessories in the
ACCESSORY
position for long periodsof time. Prolonged
operation of accessories in theACCESSORY
position coulddrain your battery and prevent
you from starting yourvehicle.
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission shift lever in PARK (P). It’s a
theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove
your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
OFF (C):This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must have
your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for
example, if your vehicle is being towed).
2-16
START (E): This starts your engine.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct
key; if
so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and rightwhile you turn the
key hard. But turn thekey only with your hand.
key or the
Using a tool to force it could break the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever toPARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal,turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
Don’t try toshift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving.If you do, youcould damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when
your vehicle is stopped.
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat
can damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t startright away, hold your keyin
START. If it doesn’t startin 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for fivemore
seconds, oruntil it starts.
2-17
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
Engine CoolantHeater (Option)
In very cold weather,
0°F (-18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get easier
starting and better fuel
economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heatershould be
plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.
When the engine starts,let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
If you don’t,
equipment, check with your dealer.
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual that tells
how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
To Use the Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Fuel Regulator
You have a fuel regulator that shuts the fuel off when
the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
2-18
A CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use
a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated
for at least15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure tounplug and
store the cord asit was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long shouldyou keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advice forthat
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are severaldifferent positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
I
A CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-19
REVERSE (R): Use this gear toback up.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis
running unlessyou have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
To be sure your
You or others could be injured.
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake
anc
(P).
move the shift lever PARK
to
See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.If
you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a Trailer”
in the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before startingthe engine. Your vehicle has a
brake-transmission shift interlock. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in the RUN position.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P)as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section.
2-20
NOTICE:
Shifting toREVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift toREVERSE (R)only after
your vehicle isstopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N)only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
0
Going less than about 35 mph (56 kmk), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
0
Going about 35 mph (56 k d h ) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down. You’ll shift
down to the next gear and have more power.
I
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEU’I AL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)is
dangerous. Unless your footis firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out PARK
of
(P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out ofPARK (P) or NEUTRAL(N) with the
engine racingisn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D) should beused for normal towing.
THIRD (3):This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when carrying aheavy load or drivingon steep hills.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2)on hills.
It can help controlyour speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces.
2-21
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (l),the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slow enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen
if you were stuck in
a solid
very deep sand or mud or were up against
object. You could damage your transmission or
transfer case or both.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes orshift into
PARK (P) to hold yourvehicle in position
on a hill.
2-22
Locking Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you
additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It
works like a standard axle most of the time, but when
one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
the locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to
move the vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive (Option)
If your vehicle has
all-wheel drive, your
engine’s driving power
is sent toall four wheels
for extra traction.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengagethe front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot.
Push down the parking brakepedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
I NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brakeon can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to
replace them, and you could
also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailerand are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the brake release lever located on the
lower left side of the steering column.
2-23
Shiftir: Into PARK (P)
A CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position
like this:
1
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly.You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re onfairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you’re pulling
a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2-24
Pull the lever toward you.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It canbe dangerous to leave your
vehicle with the
engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not
fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you
leave thevehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unlessyou have to.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
remove the key from your ignition, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift leverto PARK (P), hold the
regular brakepedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-25
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock.
You have to fully apply your regular brake before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in
the RUN position. See “Automatic Transmission” in
the Index.
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). Thisis called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
I . Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-26
Parking Over Things That Burn
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass
or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming if:
in
0 Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the roador over road debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
-
--
2-27
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s betternot to park with the engine running. But if
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Idling the engine with the air system control
off could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle (see the earlier Caution under “Engine
Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is
a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be
a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
2-28
--
It canbe dangerousto get outof your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis
running unlessyou have to. If you%e left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
(P).
move the shift lever PARK
to
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Windows
Manual Windows
To open your manual windows, turn the hand crank on
each door to raise orlower your side door windows.
Power Windows (Option)
a switch for the front passenger window as well. Your
power windows will not move unless the ignition has
been turned to RUN or ACCESSORY.
Express-Down Window
The driver's window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows you to lower it without holding the
window switch. Hold the driver's window switch down
for more than 1/2 second to activate the express-down
feature. Lightly tap the switch to open the window
slightly. The express-down feature can beinterrupted
at any time by pressing the uparrow end of the switch.
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are on each of the front side doors. The driver's door has
2-29
Swing-Out Windows
To open your swing-out
windows, pull up on
the latch and push the
window out.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and
push it down.
2-30
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear
swing-out windows, rear hatch or rear doors
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see o r smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death,
If you must drive with the rear swing-out
windows, rear hatch or rear doors openif or
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the rear swing-out
windows, rear hatchor
rear doors:
0 Make sureall windows are shut.
e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on anything butMAX A/C. That will force
outside air into your
vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
0 If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open themall the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Horn
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
To sound the horn, press thehorn symbols on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
The lever on the driver’s side of the steering column
includes your:
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjustthe steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raiseit to the highest levelto give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then releasethe lever to lock thewheel in place.
Turn and Lane Change Signals
0
Headlamp HighLow Beam Changer
0
Windshield Wipers
0
Windshield Washer
0
Cruise Control (Option)
2-31
mrn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring
for the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator
will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
To signal a lane change, justraise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
As you signal aturn or a lane change, if the arrows
don’t flash but just stay on, a signal bulb may be
burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
2-32
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel also
will be on.
Windshield Washer
Windshielr' Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single-wiping cycle,
turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers
start, then let go. The wipers
will stop after one wipe. If
you want more wipes, hold
the band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or shortdelay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter thedelay.
At the topof the multifunction lever, there's a paddle
marked with the windshield washer symbol and
PUSH. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
press the paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.
' A CAUTION:
I
In freezing weather,don't use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
For steady wiping at low speed,turn the band away from
you to LOW. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further,
to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the bandto OFF.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they're frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
2-33
Rear Window WasherWiper (Option)
You control your rear
window washedwiper
from a switch on your
instrument panel, next to
the audio system.
the washer bottle, you may not be able to wash your rear
window. If you can wash your windshield, but not your
rear window, check the fluid level.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 kmh) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
To turn the wiper on, slide the switch all the way up.
For delay wiping, slide the switch even with the word
DELAY in the center position of the rear wiper control.
The wiper will cycle every nine seconds.
To wash the window, push in on the switch, Window
washer fluid will continue tospray until the switch is
released. The wiper will continue with three more wipes
and then return to the setting that was chosen before the
lever was pushed.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the front windshield washer. If the fluid level is low in
2-34
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safelyat a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
A CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch
on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want
to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep
the cruise control switchOFF until you want
to use it.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
2-35
Resuming aSet Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise controlat a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
1
Once you’regoing about
25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the
cruise control switch
from ON to R/A for
about 1 1/2 seconds.
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
0
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less
than 3/4 of a second.Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
1 1/2 seconds, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
2-36
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Press the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
button for less than 1/2 of a second. Each time you
do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k d h ) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle Wh’- b i n g Cruise Control
Lamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applyingthe brake
takes you out of cruise control.Many drivers findthis
to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise controlon
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
0
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Your lamp switch is on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
Rotate the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol
to turn on the following:
0
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control orthe ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-37
Rotate the knob clockwise againto the master
lighting symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as
well as the headlamps.
Rotate the knob counterclockwise to OFF to turn off
your lamps.
Rotate the dial next to the knob up to adjust your
instrument panel lights. Rotate the dial up to the first
notch for fullintensity. If you rotate the dial to the
second notch, your interior lamps will come on.
Rotate the dial next to the lamp switch down to dim
your instrument panel lights.
Headlamps
You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam
by pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
A circuit breakerprotects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
2-38
Headlamps On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are turned on and your ignition is in the
OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY position. To turn the tone
off, turn the switch to OFF.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for othersto see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when:
0
the ignition is on,
0
the headlamp switch is off and
0
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkerand other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
Interior Lamps
Dome Lamps
When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light
is a reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The
other lamps that come on with your headlamps will
also come on.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the regular
lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRLwill stay off until you release the
parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
The dome lamps will come on when you open any of
the doors. They will remain on for 20 seconds after the
last door closes. When the ignition switch is turned on,
the dome lamps will go off. You can also turn on the
dome lamps by turning the dimmer dial up until the
second click.
If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pushed in, the dome
lamps will not come on.
2-39
Dome Override Button
Reading Lamps (Option)
You may have the optional reading lamps next to the
dome lamps. Turn the lamps on and off by pressing the
switch next to the lamp.
You can adjust the lamps to any desired position by
rotating the lamp and they will work when the ignition
is on or off. Be sure to turn the lamps off before you
leave the vehicle.
If the DOME OVERRIDE button is out, your interior
lamps will work as usual.
If the button is pressed in, the interior lamps will not
come on when any of the vehicle's doors areopen. The
button is located next to the lamp switch.
If you have the optional reading lamps, they will still
operate if the button is pressed in.
2-40
Mirrors
Outside Mirrors
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
of your vehicle.
Some mirrors are manually adjustable. The optional
electric mirrors come with a remote control adjustment
switch, Find the switch on the driver’s door.
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward (away from you) for day driving. Pull
the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
To move a mirror, turn the knob in the middle of the
control to L for the driver’s side mirror or to R for
the passenger’s side mirror. Then press the four-way
pad to move the mirror in the desired direction.
2-41
To make sure you do not accidentally move a mirror.
turn the knob to the middle (off‘) position.
Storage Compartments
-
Mirrors can also be folded in or out. Push the mirror
toward the vehicle to move it in. After pushing the
mirror out, adjustment will be maintained.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
1A
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
Your front storage compartment/glove box is at the
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
center of the engine cover. To open the compartment,
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
press the two tabs together and pull.
could hit a vehicleon your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
2-42
If you have an optional slidingtray storage
compartment, it is under the front passenger seat.
To open the compartment, move the latch in the top
handle and pull the tray forward.
If you have rear storagecompartments, pull up on the lid
to open the cover.
2-43
There is also a mapktorage pocket on the passenger’s
side of the engine cover console.
2-44
Installing a Garage Door Opener
Reading Lamps
Press the button near each
lamp to turn the reading
lamps on and off.
If you have a garagedoor opener, the front
overhead compartment can be used to conveniently
store the opener.
To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latch forward.
Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the direction
you want.
Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener,
as close to the center of the opener as possible.
Center the garage dooropener activation button over
the console door button and press the opener firmly
into place.
2-45
The pegs inside the
compartment door areused
to make sure the button on
the compartment door will
contact the control button
on the garage door opener.
Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when you
press the button.
2-46
Now, with the compartment
door closed, press the
button again to make sure
the garage dooropener
operates properly.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you should only
have to press the button slightly to operate the opener.
Adjust the position of the garage door opener and
add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener
operates properly. Refer to “Universal Transmitter
(Option)” text in this section.
Temperature and Compass Display
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower when
you turn on the ignition, ICE will appear on the display.
This is a warning to the driver that road conditions may
be icy, and that appropriate precautions should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to
be manually set. However, when your vehicle is new,
the compass may function erratically. If it does, CAL
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
problem, drive slowly in a complete 360" circle three
times, and the compass will function normally.
The outside air temperature and the compass are
displayed at the front of the overhead console. The
control switches arelocated to the left of the display.
Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
switch. Display the temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric)by pressing the
UWMET switch.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause falsecompass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to
set the variance foryour particular location:
1. Find your location on the zone map. Note your
zone number.
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set.
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the US/MET
switches. Thedisplay will go off.
3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the
display. When it does, release both buttons.
2-48
The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.
Convenience Net (Option)
Luggage Carrier (Option)
If you have a luggage carrier, you can load things on top
of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats, siderails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo. Themoveable tie
downs, attached to the siderails, should be used to
secure loadsto the luggage carrier.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. Follow these
guidelines:
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, in
place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
0
Carrying small,heavy loads on the roof is not
recommended.
0
Tie the load to the moveable tie down, (two per each
side of the side rails). Use the crossrails only to keep
the load from sliding.
0
If you need to carry long items, tiethe load to the
moveable tie downs provided in the side rails. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-49
~~
NOTICE:
Loading cargo thatweighs more than 200 lbs.
(91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. When you carry large things, never let
them hang over the rear or the of
sides
your
vehicle. Load your cargoso that it rests on the
slats and does not scratch
or damage thevehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forwardas you can.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and
cargo are still securely fastened.
2-50
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The cigarette lighter is on the leftof the engine
cover console.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way and let go.
When it’s done heating, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
it’s
back away from the heating element when
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
I NOTICE:
When using the cigarette lighter as an accessory
power outlet, maximum electrical load must not
exceed 20 amps. Always turn off any electrical
equipment when not inuse. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods
will drain
your battery.
The front ashtrayis just above the passenger’s side
front cupholder.
To remove the front ashtray, open it and gently pull it
slightly past its stop.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays.If you do, cigarettesor
other smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them from side to side. Your visors may
have an extension that can be pulled out for additional
glare protection and a strap forholding small items.
such as maps.
To remove the ashtray on the sliding door, open it, press
down on the inside tab and pull out.
You may have another ashtray on the driver’s sidewall.
Press the right side to turn the ashtray around for use.
To remove the ashtray, open it and gently pull it off
the hinge.
2-5 1
Visor Vanity Mirror(If Equipped)
Accessory Power Outlets (Option)
If you have accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment. Just pull up from the
bottom of the door and follow the proper installation
instructions that are included with any electrical
equipment that you install.
Passenger vans also have two accessory power
outlets located on the passenger’s side of the engine
cover console.
Another accessory power outlet is located on the
driver’s sidebehind the third row seating position,
near the floor.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
Some visors have mirrors built in, with or without
lamps. Just lift the mirror cover on each visor to turn the
lamps on, if you have them.
Lighted mirrors also have a density switch to make the
mirror lamps brighter or dimmer.
2-52
NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlets, maximum
electrical load must not exceed25 amps. Always
turn off any electrical equipment when not in use.
Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended
periods will drain your battery.
Universal Transmitter (Option)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
( 1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This devicecomplies with RSS-2 10 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received,including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
This transmitter allowsyou to consolidate the functions
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters. It
will operate garage doorsand gates, or with the
accessory package, other devices controlled
by
radio frequency such as home/office lighting systems
and security systems.
The transmitter will learn and transmit the frequencies
of most current transmittersand is powered by your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the transmitter with any garage dooropener
that does not have the “stop and reverse” feature. This
includes any garage door openermodel manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Be sure tkat people and objects are clearof the garage
door you are programming.
2-53
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a universal
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
until the red light begins to flash rapidly
(approximately 20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settings for all three channels.
If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in
the hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still
cannot program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter
end over end and try again. The universal transmitter
may not work with older garagedoor openers that do
not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated
attempts, consult your GM dealer.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the
bottom surface of the universal transmitter so that
you can still see the red light.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
universal transmitter.
3. Decide which one of the three channelsyou want to
program. Using both hands, press the hand-held
transmitter button and the desired button on the
universal transmitter. Continue to hold both buttons
through Step 4.
Operating the Transmitter
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light
on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
flashing, which could take up to 90 seconds,
indicates that the universal transmitter has been
programmed. Release both buttons once the light
starts to flash rapidly.
2-54
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The red light comes on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Note that the effective transmission range of the
universal transmitter may differ from the hand-held
transmitter and from one channel to another.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttonsuntil the red light begins to flash.
Individual channels cannotbe erased, but can be
reprogrammed using the procedure forprogramming the
transmitter explainedearlier.
Training a Garage Opener with a “Rolling
Code” Feature
If you programmed the universal transmitter, but the
garage door will not open, and if your garage door opener
was manufactured after 1995, your garage door may have
a security feature that changesthe “code” of your garage
door opener every time it is opened or closed.
To determine if your garage door opener has this
“rolling code” feature, press the appropriate button on
the universal transmitter that was programmed. If the
red light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds, then
turns solid, your garage dooropener has this feature.
To program a garage dooropener with the rolling code
feature, do the following:
2. Remove the cover panel from the garage door opener
receiver. It is located nearthe garage door opener motor.
3. Locate the training button on the garage door opener
receiver. The exact location and color will vary
among brands.
4. Press the training button on the garage door opener
receiver for one to two seconds.
5 . Return to your vehicle and press the programmed
button on the universal transmitter until the red light
flashes rapidly (about two seconds).
6. Release the button, then press it again to confirm it
was programmed to the garage door opener receiver.
You may now use either the universal transmitter or the
hand-held transmitter to open your garage door. If you
still have difficulty in programming and require
assistance, please call 1-800-355-35 15.
Accessories
Accessories for the universal transmitter areavailable
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-35 15.
1. Program your hand-held transmitter to the universal
transmitter by following the steps provided under
“Programming the Transmitter” earlier in this section.
2-55
Instrument Panel
2-56
A. Lamp Switches
K. Rear Heater Control
B. Instrument Panel Dimmer
L. Rear WasherNiper
C. Multifunction Lever
M. Front Ashtray
D. Hazard Lamp Switch
N. Accessory Power Outlets
E. Transmission Shift Lever
E Ignition Switch
0. Cupholders/Storage Tray
G. Rear Hatch Release
Q. Audio System
H. Rear Defogger
R. CigaretteLighter
P.
FrontStorage Compartment
I.
Comfort Controls
S. Hood Release
J.
Rear A/C Control
T. Dome Override Button
2-57
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glancehow your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, about how much fuel remains, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
2-58
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your odometer is tamper resistant. The digitalodometer
will read 999,999 if someone tries to turn it back.
The trip odometer will appear in place of your regular
odometer when you press the TRIP button.
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the TRIP
button. To change back to the regularodometer, press
the TRIP button again.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set tothe
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if
it can’t,then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on
the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when
the new odometer was installed.
2-59
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine justto let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-60
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lightS
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone wi.t1:I
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety bel is
already buckled.
~
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
55 seconds. If the driver’s
belt is already buckled,
neither the tone nor the
light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light onthe instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stayson after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving,your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash forfew
a
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Indicator Light
The charglngsystem light
will come on briefly when
you turn the ignition on, but
the engine is not running, as
a check to show you the
light is working.
Then it should go outonce the engineis running. If it
stays on, orcomes on while you are driving,you may
have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate thatyou have a looseaccessory drive
belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked
right away. Driving whilethis light is on could drain
your battery.
If you must drive ashort distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and heatedair conditioner.
Voltmeter
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position).
the gage shows your
battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operatingin
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle foran
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to providefull power at
engine idle.As engine speedsare increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to createmaximum power.
You can only drive fora short time with the readings in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
When the ignition is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
2-62
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you, For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there couldbe a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
This light shouldcome
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving,pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer tothe floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See“Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
A CAUTION:
Your brake system maynot be working properly
if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving
with the brake system warning lighton can lead
to an accident.If the light is still
on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
2-63
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
ANTI LOCK
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, orcomes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning lightisn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-64
Engine Co ant Temperature Gage
~
If the gage pointer moves
to the red area, your engine
is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant hasoverheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows you what
to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
NOTICE:
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions areat acceptable levels forthe life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by
Enhanced Diagnostics.) TheSERVICE ENGINE SOON
light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctionsoften will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent. Thismay
prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may no
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission controlsystem on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service is required.
0
Light On Steady -- An emission controlsystem
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosisand
service may be required.
2-65
If the Light Is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel capwill allow fuel to evaporate intothe
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place topark your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
2-66
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one ormore of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuelto turn the light off.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or otherproblems causing low
oil pressure.
If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off,
have your dealer or qualified servicecenter check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
I
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage shows
serviced.
the engine oil
pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running.
1
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can becomeso hot that it
catches fire.You or others could beburned.
Check your oilas soon as possible and have your
vehicle
NOTICE:
Damage to your enginefrom neglected oil
problems can be costlyand is not covered by
your warranty.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressurein kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
2-67
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator L' -'-
I
--k* Gages
--
You will have this light
on the instrument panel.
It goes on whenever the
:::O
..e
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) are on.
When it begins to get dark, theDRL indicator light is
a reminder to turn on your headlamps.
2-68
Light
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine.
CHECK
GAGES
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your various gages to see if they are in the
warning zones.
Here are things some owners ask about.None of these
indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage tells you
how much fuel you have
remaining when the
ignition is on.
0
At the gas station,the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
The fuel tank will take either a little more or a little
less fuel to fill up than the gage shows.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
0
The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
turn off the ignition.
When the gage first indicatesEMPTY (E), you still
have a little fuel left,but you should getmore fuel as
soon as possible.
2-69
b%
2-70
NOTES
4%) NOTES
2-71
b%
2-72
NOTES
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offeredwith your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems suppliedwith your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
Comfort Controls
Heating/Air Conditioning System
Heating System
Rear Heating System (Option)
Rear Air Conditioning System (Option)
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defrosting
Ventilation System
Rear Window Defogger (Option)
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systemswithout
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems
with
Automatic Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo
3-1 1
3-13
3-18
3-19
3-24
3-26
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-30
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing a Compact Disc in the Single Remote
Disc Player (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Fan Knob
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your comfort control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
This control has four positions. To increase airflow,
turn the knob toward HI. To decrease airflow, move it
toward LO.
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Temperature Knob
Heating/Air Conditioning System
This knob is next to the fan knob. It selects the
temperature of the air flowing into your vehicle. Move
the knob clockwise for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise for coolerair.
Function Knob
This knob is next to the temperature knob.
OFF: This setting turns the system off.
MAX A/C: This cools the air the fastest, by
recirculating the inside air. Move the temperature knob
all the way counterclockwise.
A/C: This setting brings in outside air and cools it.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heatinghir
conditioning controls will look like this.
3-2
+.
+#
BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in outside air
through the heater floor vent and the instrumentpanel
vents. If you move the temperature knobbetween hot
and cold, cooler airwill come out of the upper vents
while warmer air comesout of the floor vent. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
cool the air.
Heating System
+e
/J VENT: The air comes outat the vents on your
instrument panel. The air conditioning
compressor will
not run in this position. Adjust the temperature knob for
warmer or coolerair.
+’
+’
0
HEATER: Most of the air comes out near the
floor. The rest comes out from the defroster ventsunder
the windshield and at the front side windows.
w
e
BLEND: With this setting, the heated outside air
comes out both the heater vents and defroster vents.
Adjust the temperature knob for warmer or coolerair.
DEFROST This setting operatesthe defroster.
Most of the air comes out near the windshield, with
some going to the floor vents and front side windows.
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, your
heater controls will look like this.
Fan Knob
This control has four positions. To increase airflow,
turn the knob toward HI. To decrease airflow, move it
toward LO.
Temperature Knob
This knob is next to the fan knob. It selects the
temperature of the air flowing into your vehicle. Move
the knob clockwise for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise for cooler air.
3-3
Function Knob
Rear Heating System(Option)
This knob is next to the temperature knob. The function
knob allows you to choose the direction of air delivery.
OFF: This setting turns the system off.
-0
/J VENT The air comes out at the vents on your
instrument panel.
-bo
+fl
BI-LEVEL: With this setting, the heated
outside aircomes out both the instrumentpanel vents
and heater vents. Adjust the temperature knob for
warmer or coolerair.
’4
HEATER: Most of the air comes out near the
floor. The rest comes out from the defroster
vents under
the windshield and at the front sidewindows.
@70
+#BLEND: With this setting, the heated outside air
comes out both the heater vents and defroster vents.
Adjust the temperature knob for warmer or cooler air.
9DEFROST This setting operates the defroster.
Most of the air comes out near the windshield, with
some going to the floor vents and front sidewindows.
3-4
You may have the optional rear heater. The three-speed
fan switch is to the right of the radio. Turn the switch
toward HIGH for higher airflow in the rear area. Turn
the switch to the OFF position to turn the system off.
Rear Air Conditioning System (Option)
Air Conditioning
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning,open the
windows to clear the vehicle of hot air. This reduces the
time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep
your windows closed for the air conditionerto work at
its best.
You can use MAX A/C with the temperature knob in the
blue area when it’s really hot outside and you need to
cool the inside air quickly. MAX A/C lets in only a little
air from the outside.
If you first use MAX A/C, you can then use A/C with
the temperature knob in the blue area, as soon as the
vehicle has cooled down, so outside air will be going
through your vehicle.
You may have rear air conditioning. Therear air
conditioning switch is located to the right of the heater
controls. Turn the switch toward HIGH for higher
airflow in the rear area. Turn the switch to the OFF
position to turn the system off.
3-5
If your vehicle has rear air conditioning, settingit on LO
may enhance the front A/C performance by allowing
trapped refrigerant in the rear lines to circulate.
The rear air conditioning system will only send cooled
air if the front system is on. It can still be used to
circulate air, even if the front system is off.
When the air conditioning, DEFROST or BLEND is on,
you may notice a slight increase ordecrease in engine
speed, due tocompressor operation. This is normal
because the system is designed to cycle the compressor
on and off to keep the desired temperature.
Heating
On cold days, use HEATER with the temperature knob
in the red area. Outside airwill be brought in through
the floor outlets. The heater works best if you keep your
windows closed while using it.
If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
Defrosting
Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the
windshield quickly in extremely cold conditions.The
temperature knob should be in the red area and the fan
control toward high. The air conditioningcompressor
may operate in this setting to dehumidify the air.
The BLEND setting is useful for coldweather with a
large number of passengers or very humid conditions to
help keep the windshield clear.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
instrument panel vents.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air tothe inside of your vehicle when it is
moving. With the side windows closed, air will flow into
the front air inlet grilles at the base of the windshield,
through the vehicle and out the rear airexhaust valves.
Outside airwill also enter the vehicle when the heater or
the air conditioning fanis running.
When you close a vent, it will increase the flow of air
coming out of any vents that are open.
If you have rear heating or rear air conditioning,you
will have adjustable vents in the rear of the vehicle to
help direct the airflow. The rear air conditioningvents
are located in the headliner at the rear of the vehicle.
The rear heating vents are located next to the second and
third seat on the driver’s sideof the vehicle, near the
floor. You can move the vents to direct the flow of air, or
close the vents altogether. When you close a vent, it will
increase the flow of air coming out of any vents that
are open.
Ventilation Tips
Your vehicle has air vents near the center and on the
sides of the instrument panel that allow you to adjust the
direction and the amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Push the vent up or down to direct airflow to your
preference. Increase or reduce the amount of airflow by
opening and closing the louvers. The vents rotate to
direct the airflow from side to side.
0
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
0
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
blower fan to HIGH for a few moments before
driving off. This helps clear the intake ductsof snow
and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clearof
objects. Thishelps air to circulatethroughout
your vehicle.
3-7
Rear Window Defogger (Option)
If your vehicle has this option, the rear window will
have lines running across the glass. These lines heat
your window.
For best results, clear the window of as much snow or
ice as possible before using the rear window defogger.
To turn on the rear window
defogger, find the button to
the leftof the heater
Press the button until the light comes on, then release it.
3-8
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition switch is in the RUN position,
You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing
the button again. The defogger will shut itself off after
several minutes so that the glass does not get too hot. If
the window still isn’t clear$turn the defogger on again.
NOTICE:
Scraping the insideof your rear window could
cut and damage the defogger.
Your warranty
would not coverthis damage. Anddon’t put
decaIs there, you might have to scrape them off.
Audio Systems
AM-FM Stereo
Your Delco@ audiosystem has been designed to operate
easily and give yearsof listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on the display.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on thedisplay. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL orHR/MIN and the time
will be displayed for afew seconds. Thereis an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
3-9
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM
and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on the
display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next higher
station and press the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station. Press VOLUME or both SEEK buttons to
stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting theTone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decreasethe treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
(If Equipped)
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FMl and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
2 1 stations (seven AM, seven FM 1 and seven FM2).
Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-11
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoiningbuttons at the same time. Just:
Setting the Tone
1. Tune in the desired station.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds. Whenever you press the same two
buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
PSCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each
of your preset stations. Thesystem will scan through
and play each preset station stored On your pushbuttons
for a fewseconds. Press either SEEK button or
RECALL to stop scanning through the preset stations.
3-12
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position bahnces the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to worK Des1 with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
BAL
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs VOLUME,
for
FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for the radio.
REV. Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing thetape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Pressthe SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tapeor stop the
tape and play the radio. If you leave a cassette tape in the
player while listeningto the radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five secondsto
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of being rotated continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
3-13
SCV Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise toadjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each detent on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at a fasterrate of speed.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. Thereceiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM 1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to thenext higher
station and the left arrow to tuneto the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-14
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6 . Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FM 1 or FM2 mode and then press
PSCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing
to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press€?SCAN
again or one of the pushbuttons tostop scanning to listen
to a specific preset station.P.SCAN will light up on the
display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on
a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the
radio display will show the channel number (Pl-P6) for
several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turnthe knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble.When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(CountryNestern) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-15
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls justas you do
for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will
be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top sideis selected for
play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or Cr02 and adjusts for best playback sound.
For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for theprevious selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tapedirection
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
the tape to the other.
3-16
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for theplayer to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. Thesound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.
00 (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
CD Adapter Kits
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
To activate the bypass feature, the ignition must be on.
Turn your radio off. Press TAPE AUX and hold for
three seconds. After three seconds, the tape symbol in
the display will flash for two seconds indicating the
feature is active. Insert the adapter cassette again.It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
will now play. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off.To load a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading the
cassette. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while
listening to the radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activatingthe bypass feature on your
tape player.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-17
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
PWR: Press this button to turn the rear seat audio
system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted when
the power is turned on. You may operate the rear seat
audio functionseven when the primary radio power
is off.
VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise toincrease volume and
counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob
back in to its stored position when you’re not using it.
The upper VOL knob controls the upper headphone and
the lower VOL knob controls the lower headphone.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to a
different music source than the front seat passengers
including AM-FM automatic tone control and cassette
tapes. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a
cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens
to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each
headphone. Be aware that the front seat audio controls
always override the rear seat audio controls.
Note that this feature is intended for rear seat
passengers. Please do not use headphones while driving.
3-18
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM 1
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to
AM-FM, the rear seat audio controllerwill not switch
between the bands and cannot change the frequency.
SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next higher
station and stay there. Press the down arrow to tune to
the next lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking. The SEEK button is inactive if the
AM-FM mode on the front radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to
hear the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow
to go back to the previous selection.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into
SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for
a few seconds. The receiverwill continue to scan and
momentarily stop at each station until you press
SEEK again.
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
P.SET PROG: The front passengersmust be listening
to something different for each of these three functions
to work:
Press this button to seek through your preset radio
stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
go to the other side of the tape.
TAPE CD: With a cassette tape in the player and the
radio playing, press this button to play a cassettetape.
Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape
is playing. The inactivetape will remain safely inside
the radio for future listening.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is
capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
3-19
SCV Your system has a featurecalled
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each detent on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at a faster rate of speed.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM 1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right m o w to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrowto tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-20
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons. Select
either the AM, FMl or FM2 mode and then press
P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing
to scan through all of the pushbuttons. PressPSCAN
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen
to a specific stored station. PSCANwill light up on the
display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on
a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the
radio display will show the channel number (Pl-P6) for
several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the six
preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to the
music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C N
(CountryNestern) orJAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a BASS
or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for
rear speakers. Themiddle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-21
Playing aCompact Disc
PWR: Press this knobto turn the system on. (Please note
that you canalso turn the systemon when you insert a
compact disc into the player with the ignition
on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
3-22
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for theprevious selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound
is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc isat the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and tenths of a second. Thetrack
number will also appearwhen a new track begins to
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. TheCD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM 1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD. If you leave acompact
disc in the player while listening to the radio, it may
become warm.
3-23
Playing a Compact Disc in the Single Remote
Disc
Player (If Equipped)
If you have this option, you can play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the
label side up and insert it carefully into the player
(approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be
pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition
is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and
begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and unload
CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the
ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
3-24
A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
0 The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an
hour and try again.)
You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.
PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press PREV again to go to the previous track on
the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to helpyou find the correct passage.
RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, the previous or next track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go
back to the start of the current track. It will go back to
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If
both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.
EJECT Press this button on the remote player to eject a
compact disc. I f you leave a compact disc in the player
while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
3-25
Theft-Deterrent Feature
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
THEFTLOCK TM is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
3. Turn the radio off.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
3-26
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together, Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows;pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2. Turn the radio off.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
4. Press HR to make the first one ortwo digits agree
with your code.
5. Press M N again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
If you enter the wrong code eight times,INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret codeyou have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals
will reach only about 10 to40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longerrange, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almostundetectable
until it is too late.Your hearing canadapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
3-28
.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sureyou can add
what you want.If’you can, it’s very important to
do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s
engine, Delcoradio or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere
with the operationof sound equipmentthat has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to checkFederal rules
covering mobileradio and telephone units.
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or adamaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes shouldbe stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failureof the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassettehas no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbingaction,
non-abrasive cleaning cassettewith pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassetteturn. It
is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensurethorough
cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is
available through your GM dealership.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabricbelt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassettewill not
eject and, it may not clean as thoroughly as the
scrubbing type cleaner.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
.
display --- to show the indicator was re: .
Cassettes aresubject to wear and the S O L . L quality
~
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender.
3-30
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different
kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-1 1
4-12
4-13
4- 14
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving atNight
4- 16
4-18
4- 19
4-2 1
4-2 1
4-22
4-24
4-28
4-3 1
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other driversare going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
4-2
Death and injury associatedwith drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributorto the
highway death toll, claiming thousandsof victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve thishighway safety problem
is forpeople never to drink alcoholand then drive. But
what if people do?How much is “too much” if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general informationon the problem.
Alcohol affects fourthings that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
0
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
Muscular Coordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
Vision
0
0
Attentiveness.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
0
The length of time it has takenthe drinker to
consume the alcohol.
Police recordsshow that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases,
these deaths arethe result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, some 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking.For persons under 2 1, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychologicaland
developmental reasons for these laws.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or threemixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, aswe’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers areimpaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about anhour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.No amount of coffee ornumber of cold
the
showers will speed thatup. “I’ll be careful” isn’t
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, aswhen a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderateBAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
and driving that
There’s something else about drinking
many people don’t know. Medical researchshows that
alcohol in aperson’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
I
Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have aserious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’tdrink anddrive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if
you’re witha group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
--
--
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time.Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average,reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only anaverage. It might beless with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs and
frustration. But even in 314 of a second, avehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
I
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); thecondition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re drivingon snow or ice,it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may getharder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
’
ANTI LOCK
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
1 See “Anti-Lock Brake
1 System Warning Light” in
I the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps outin
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
4-8
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance.If you get too close tothe vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes
vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but ‘.sis normal.
*
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steeringcan help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assistbecause the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control’’ accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver orbeginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction.If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one Factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve.Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
4-9
What should you do if this everhappens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signsnear curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, theposted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditionsyou’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering canbe more effective than
braking. For example,you come over a hill and finda
truck stoppedin your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in frontof you. You can avoid these
problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room, That’s the time for
evasive action-- steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attentionand a
quick decision.If you are holdingthe steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations arealways
possible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat
all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the
accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerso
that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement.You
can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your
steering wheelto go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for justthe right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender tofrustration or angercan
suddenly put the passing driver face to facewith the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicatea
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicatesit’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross
a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.
’
4-12
Do not get too close tothe vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops.Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to causeyou to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for anotheropportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out topass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
0
0
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signalbefore moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirroris convex. The vehicleyou
just passed may seem tobe farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon
two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or startingto turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driverto get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving expertssay about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’thave enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.
In any emergency, don’t giveup. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or areaof less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a drivercan lose controlof the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not
“overdriving” those conditions.But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspondto your vehicle’s
three control systems.In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling, In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid,too
much throttle causesthe driving wheels to spin.
4-13
A cornering skid and an acceleration slud are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Driving at Night
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice orpacked snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are sometips on night driving.
a Drive defensively.
a Don’t drink and drive.
a Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
a
a
a
a
glare fromheadlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles,
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass c-1 your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are ingood shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
4-16
Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theywc t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving througha large puddleof water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakeswork normally.
~
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven
going through some car washes can cause problems,too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you're
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn't happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops "dimple" the
water's surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn't ahard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
4-17
Driving Through DeepStanding Water
City Driving
NOTICE:
If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddlesor
standing water, water can come inthrough your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Neverdrive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddlesor standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-18
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
0
Freeway Driving
Know the best way to get to where you are going.
Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city justas you would for a
cross-country trip.
/I
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is
there because the corner is busy enough
to need it.
When a light turns green, and
just before you start to
move, check both waysfor vehrcles that have not
cleared the intersectionor may be running thered light.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-19
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clearview of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance overyour shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or tothe prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
4-20
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t anothervehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving?Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, haveit done before startingout. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service expertsin GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some thingsyou can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the wei----er outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actuallysuch a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleepat the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tlet it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road
in less
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
4-21
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-22
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
*
*
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. Theseparts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
A CAUTION:
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the workof slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work
well. You would
then have poor brakingor even none going down
a hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and yourvehicle in gear when
you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you canclimb the hill better.
hot that’theywouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to
let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the topof a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like
a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples arelong grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks areaor winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, arag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a coupleof burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-24
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
.....
’E
......
..___..
..
1.I.......
$!.....
....
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
a Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
a Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What’s the worst time for this?“Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-25
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
0
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
0
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be i n a
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-26
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can't see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snowfrom
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn't collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side.of the
vehicle that's away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, makeit go a little faster
than just idle. That is,push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling lateron
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for awhile.
Then, shut the engineoff and close the window almost
all the way to preservethe heat. Start the engine again
and repeat thisonly when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as longas you can. To help keepwarm, you can get
out of the vehicleand do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
4-27
Loading Your Vehicle
The CertificatiodTire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, cargoand tongue weight, if pulling
a trailer.
The CertificationITire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, calledthe Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual
loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
The Certificationmire label in your vehicle will look
similar to thisexample.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or GAWR
for eitherthe front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out.
4-28
I A CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you
to lose control.
Also, overloading canshorten the life of
your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail becauseof overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else-- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash,they’ll keep going.
I
Things you put inside your vehicle can strik
injure people ina sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.
0 Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
0 When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secureit whenever you can.
0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou
need to.
4-29
Payload
The Payload Capacity is shown on the Certificationire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
people inside as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things
from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
Trailering Package
Add-on Equipment
I
I
I
When you carry removable items, you may need to puta
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install
the new equipment.
DI
U.-,A
4-30
If your vehicle comes with the Trailering Package, there
is also aload rating which includes the weight of the
vehicle and the trailer it tows. Thisrating is called the
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
When you weigh yourtrailer, be sure to include the
weight of everything you put in it. And, remember to
figure the weight of the people inside as part of
your load.
Your dealer can helpyou determine your GCWR.
Towing a Trailer
NOTICE:
I
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example,if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not workwell o r even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer ordy if you have followed all the
steps in thissection. Ask your GM dealer for
a trailer
advice and information about towing
with your vehicle.
--
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
by
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow
the advice in this part, and
see your GM dealer
for important information about towing a trailer
with yourvehicle.
Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If yours
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready
for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-31
If You Do DecideTo Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some importantpoints:
0
0
0
0
0
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state orprovincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less.You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine,
axle or otherparts could bedamaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmh) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
You should use DRIVE (D) (or, as you need to, a
lower gear) when towing a trailer, Operating your
vehicle in DRIVE (D) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of
your transmission.
4-32
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
0
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to useyour rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
Two-Wheel
Drive
3.23
3.42
3.73
4,500 lbs. (1 8 16 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
5,500 lbs. ( 2 497 kg)
All-Wheel
Drive
3.42
3.73
4,500 lbs. (1 8 16 kg)
5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. Theweight of
additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1 H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. TheGross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-33
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for coldtires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t
go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the
weight of the trailer tongue.
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index). Dirt and water can, too.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. Thisequipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave justenough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-34
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap intoyour vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system, except:
0
Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the
trailer’s brake system will use more than 0.02 cubic
inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t work
well. You could even lose your brakes.
0
Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of
pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not be
used with your vehicle.
0
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rearbrakes. But don’t use copper tubing
for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
- -
If you havea rear-most window openand you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could comeinto your vehicle.You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousnessor
death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.) To
maximize your safety when towing trailer:
a
0 Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
0 Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window inthe rear oranother
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system onand with the
fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
MAX A/C because it only recirculates the
air inside your vehicle. (See‘‘ Comfort
Controls” inthe Index.)
4-35
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out forthe open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longerand not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electricalconnector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This letsyou check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-36
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, treesor other objects.Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring (included in the optional trailering package).
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal aturn or lane change.Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash,telling other
drivers you’re aboutto turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turnseven if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
To avoid this, let the
similar to engine overheating.
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the
overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
4-37
Parking onHills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
0
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts
are tight.
4-38
Trailer Wiring Harness
If you have the optionaltrailering package, your vehicle
will have an eight-wire harness, includingthe center
high-mounted stoplamp battery feed wire. The harness
is stored on the passenger sideof the vehicle near the
rear wheel well. This harnesshas a 30 amp battery feed
wire and no connector, and should be wired by a
qualified electrical technician.After choosing an
aftermarket trailermating connector pair, have the
technician attach one connector tothe eight-wire trailer
harness and the other connector tothe wiring harness on
the trailer. Be sure the wiring harness on the trailer is
taped or strapped to the trailer’s frame rail and leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground. The eight-wire
harness must be routed out of your vehicle between the
rear door and the floor, with enough of the harness left
on both sides so that the trailer orthe body won’t pull it.
If you do not have the optional trailering package, your
vehicle will still have a trailering harness. The harness is
located near the passenger’s side rear wheel well. It
consists of six wires that may be used by after-market
trailer hitch installers. Thetechnician can use the
following colorcode chart when connecting thewiring
harness to your trailer.
Brown: Rear lamps.
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
0
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
White (Heavy Gage): Ground.
Light Green: Back-up lamps.
White (Light Gage): Center High-Mounted Stoplamp.
Blue: Auxiliary circuit (eight-wire harness only).
0
Orange: Fused auxiliary (eight-wire harness only).
Store the harnessin its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
4-39
&
4-40
NOTES
&
NOTES
4-41
&I
4-42
NOTES
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems thatcan occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-7
5- 13
5-15
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Cooling System
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-35
5-36
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a FlatTire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of
the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press the button down to make your front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning
flashers work no matter what position your key is in,
and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button down again.
When the hazard warning flashers are on. your turn signals
won’t work. They also won’t flash while you’re braking.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
NOTICE:
If you carry reflective triangles,you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use another
vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle. But
please follow the numbered steps todo it safely.
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damag
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
Trying to start yourvehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your
vehicle.
I. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
1
Batteries can hurtyou. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burnyou.
0 They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these things canhurt you.
I NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t
a 12-volt system witha
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause aground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump startprocedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter oraccessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio!
NOTICE:
I
I
If you leaveyour radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.
Using a matchnear a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight
if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.You don’t
need toadd water to the Delco Freedom@battery
installed in everynew GM vehicle. Butif a
battery has filler caps,be sure the right amount
of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If’you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acidthat can burn you.
Don’t getit on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medicalhelp immediately.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation.If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could bedamaged too.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable tothe
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Before you connect the cables, here aresome basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a metal engine part.Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too.
-
A CAI’TION:
f--
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal
of the good battery.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engines are running.
I’
5-5
1 8.
Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other end
of the negative (-) cable
does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a
heavy unpainted metal
part of the vehicle with
the dead battery.
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other orany other metal.
9. Make your last connection away from the battery,
to the engine block, frame or otherunpainted metal
parts of your vehicle.
The electrical connection is just as good there, but
the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-6
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C . Dead Battery
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. They can provide the right
equipment and know how to tow it without damage. See
“Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting, or special tires
and wheels, these
things canbe damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
Whether your vehicle has rear-wheel drive or the
all-wheel-drive option.
I A CAUTION:
To help avoid injury to
you o r others:
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle thatis
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towinga vehicle.
Use T-hooks on front or rearof vehicle.
That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment.
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-7
A vehicle can fallfrom a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured.This can cause a collision,
serious personalinjury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes,leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
in the OFF position. The steeringwheel should be
clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission
should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking
brake released.
If your vehicle has the all-wheel-drive option, it can
only be towed with all four wheels off the ground. A
dolly must be used under the un-raised wheels when
towing or the vehicle must be transported on a flat
bed carrier.
Don’t have your vehicle towed with the wheels in
contact with the ground if it has all-wheel drive. If a
vehicle with all-wheel drive must be towed with
sling-type or wheel-lift equipment, then either the front
or rear wheels must be supported on a dolly.
I NOTICE:
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive,
do not haveit
towed with the wheels in contact withthe ground
or vehicle damage may occur.
A dolly must be
used under the un-raised wheels when towingor
the vehicle must betransported on aflat
bed carrier.
Towing From the Front
(Except All-Wheel Drive)
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k d ) , 50 miles (80 km)
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or the
front bumpersystem will be damaged.Use
wheel-lift or car-carrierequipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle
to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage,install a towing dollyand
raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the
T-hook slots.
5-9
Towing From the Front(All-Wheel Drive)
A towing dolly must be used under the rear wheels when
towing from the front.
I
5-10
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the
front bumper systemwill be damaged. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment.To
help avoid damage, installa towing dolly and
raise the vehicle until adequate clearanceis
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the
T-hook slots.
Towing From the Rear
(Except All-Wheel Drive)
I
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or the rear
bumper system will be damaged.Use wheel-lift
or car-carrierequipment. Additionalramping
may be required for car-carrierequipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage canoccur from vehicle
to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage,install a towing dollyand
raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
5-11
Towing From the Rear(All-Wheel Drive)
A towing dolly must be used under thefront wheels
when towing from the reaK
5-12
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the rear
bumper systemwill be damaged. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
vehicle
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment.To
help avoid damage, install
a towing dolly and
raise the vehicle until adequate clearanceis
obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperaturegage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel.See “Gages” in
the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
“‘ON:
Steam froman overheated engine can burn
you
badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away
from the engineif you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from thevehicle until itcools down. Wait until
of steam or coolant beforeyou
there is no sign
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or
Stop your engineif
others could be badly burned.
out of the vehicle until the
it overheats, and get
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, your
vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be
covered by your warranty.
5-13
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer, See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this fora minute or so:
1 . Turn off your air conditioner.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D).
5-14
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive.
Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the
warning doesn’t come backon, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until
the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle
speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle speed
after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, if you still have the warning, turn o f t h e
engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
The coolant level should be at the ADD mark.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
5-15
A
CAUTION:
- - - - Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, can be very hot.
Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run theengine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could
lose all coolant.That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned.
Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle.
I NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See
if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by
pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your
vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
5-16
How to Add Coolant to theCoolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water
(prefembly distilled) and DEX-COOL@ (silicate-free)
antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
,/!\
CAU [ON:
- - -
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain water or the wrong
mix, your engine could
get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire
and you or
others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL@ coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.
You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
5-17
JTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from
a hot cooling
system canblow out and burnyou badly. They
are underpressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the capwhen the
cooling system, includingthe radiator pressure
system and
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
-0
5-18
--
How to Add Coolant to the radiator
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
radiator pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it
first stops. (Don’t press
down while turning the
pressure cap.)
I
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap, but now
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-19
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
5-20
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the
engine fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
5-21
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
This vehicle has a clutched engine coolingfan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster toprovide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not fully engaged. This
improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
It’s unusual for a tireto “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,”here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
If a fronttire fails, the flat tire will create adrag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stopwell out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.
5-22
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
I A CAUTION:
Changing a tire cancause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack androll overyou or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level placeto change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. ' h r n off the engine.
4. Put the wheel blocksat the front and
rear of the tire farthest
away from the
one being changed.That would be the
tire on the other side of the vehicle, at
the opposite end.
I
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-23
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored by your
vehicle’s rear doors, alongthe passenger side wall.
Remove your jack cover by pulling it away from the
side wall and down to release the tabs securing the top
of the cover.
5-24
Remove the wheel blocks by turning the top nut
counterclockwise. Remove the nut and washer, then pull
the wheel blocks off the bolt. Push down on the bolt and
remove the hooked end from the slot. Slide the jack
toward the front of the vehicle and lift it from the
mounting. Remove the extension and the ratchet from
the pouch.
It also has a DOWN side.
Your spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the ratchet and extension to lower
the spare tire.
Attach the ratchet, with the DOWN side facingyou, to
the extension. Theextension has a socket end and a flat
chisel end.
5-25
When the tire has been
lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable andpull
it through the wheel opening.
Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through the
hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper. Be sure
the flat end connects into the hoist shaft.
Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
I NOTICE:
Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire
to the ground. Keep turning the ratchet until the spare
tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
5-26
To help avoid vehicle damage,do not drive the
vehicle before cable is restored.
A
The tools you'll be using include the jack (A), wheel
blocks (B), extension (C) and ratchet (D).
Removing the Wheel Covers
You will have to take off hub caps or wheel nut caps to
reach your wheel nuts.
If you have a standard steel wheel, carefully pry along
the edge of the hub cap until it comes off. Be careful, the
rim edges may be sharp. Don't try to remove the hub
cap with your bare hands.
If you have the styled steel wheel, loosen the plastic nut
caps with the ratchet and socket. Make sure the DOWN
side faces you.
To remove the hub cap from the aluminum wheel, fit the
flat end of the extension into the notch. Then, remove
the center cap.
5-27
5-28
4. Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
5. Rotate the ratchet to the right. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.
6. Position the jack under the vehicle.
-
A CAUTION:
I
Getting under a vehicle when
it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle whenit is supported onlyby a jack.
5-29
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, besure to fit the jacklift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
~
~
~
~~~~~~~~
~~
~
~
~
Do not jack up the vehicle with people in or near
the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the vehicle
far enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-30
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
I A CAUTION:
A CAI'TION:
Never use oil or grease on studsor nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come
loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Put on the spare tire. Put the nuts on by hand. Make
sure the cone-shaped end is toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut can't be turned by hand,
use the extension and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
Rust or dirt on the
wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become loose after a time. The
wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust
or
dirt off.
5-31
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a criss-cross
sequence as shown. Turn
the ratchet clockwise with
the UP mark facing you.
A CAUTION:
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-32
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, besure to getnew GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhereas soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened witha torque wrench to 100 lb-ft
(140 Nom).
I
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tightenthe wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
13. Remove the wheel blocks.
I NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’tfit on your compact spare. If
you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you coulddamage the cover or the spare.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Storing a jack, a tire or otherequipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury.In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
1. Put the flat tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle, with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Tilt the retaining bar downward and through the
wheel opening. Make sure it is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel. Attach the ratchet, with the
UP side facingyou, to the extension.
5-33
3. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle through
the hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper.
Turn the ratchet clockwise until the tire is against the
underside of the vehicle.
I
You will feel two “clicks” when the tire is up all the
way. Try to move the tire with your hands to make
sure it is securely in place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the
storage instructions label to restore your compact
spare properly.
3
Return the jacking equipment to its proper location.
. Jacking Tool Storage Bag
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
5-34
Jack
Bracket
Jacking Instruction Tag
Bolt/Screw
Wheel Blocks
Washer
Nut
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check
the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds upto 65 mph
(105 k d h ) for distancesup to 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare
is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel,
and maybe other parts
of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using
them can damage your
vehicle and can damage
the chainstoo. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
5-35
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheels too fast.The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
1 NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy partsof your
vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth,you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, andyou or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts
of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you’re
stuck, spin thewheels as little as
possible. Don’t
spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 k m h ) a sshown
on the speedometer.
5-36
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. If
that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
b.6) NOTES
fi
5-38
NOTES
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information aboutthe care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-7
6-1 1
6- 15
6- 19
6-20
6-23
6-25
6-25
6-29
6-30
6-30
6-3 1
6-32
6-36
6-36
6-36
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Cover
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transmission Fluid
All-Wheel Drive
Rear Axle
Engine Coolant
Radiator PressureCap
Thermostat
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Halogen Bulbs
6-42
6-43
6-50
6-5 1
6-54
6-55
6-55
6-57
6-5 8
6-5 8
6-58
6-59
6-60
6-60
6-60
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-68
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Tires
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-1
Service
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you
to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
n
w
Delco
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper GM Service Manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
6-2
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
You can be injured andyour vehicle could be
damaged if you try todo service work ona
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metrid’
fasteners can beeasily confused. Ifyou use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or falloff. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outsideof your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your GM dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside
of your vehicle.
J
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octaneor higher.
D48 14
At a minimum, it should meet specifications ASTM
in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada.
Improved gasoline specifications have been developed
by
the American Automobile Manufacturers Association
(AAMA) for better vehicle performance and
engine
protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification
could provide improved driveability and emission control
system protection comparedto other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damageyour engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher
and you
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or drivingup a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octanefuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified tomeet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label),
it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission controlsystem performance
may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for diagnosis
to determine the
cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containingMMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lampon your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs,return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
6-3
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated
gasolines may be available in your area to help clean the
air. General Motorsrecommends that you use these
gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it.
It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
6-4
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States orCanada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors International Product Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7
Filling Your Tank
A CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
The fuelcap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s side
of your vehicle.
6-5
A CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself
and then
something ignitesit, you couldbe badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you openthe
fuel fillercap too quickly.This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full,and is more likely in
hot weather. Openthe fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
While refueling, place the cap in the holder on the fuel
filler door.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The caphas a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
6-6
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaningthe
Outside of Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
When you put the capback on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound.Make sure
you fully install the cap.The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into
the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Checking Things Under the Hoc4
m Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These includeliquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could beburned. Be careful not to drop orspill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-7
Hood Release
1
6-8
When you open the hood, this is what you will see:
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
Fill Location
D. Transmission Dipstick/Fill
Location
G. Brake Master
Cylinder Reservoir
B. Coolant Fill Location
E. Air Cleaner
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Oil Dipstick Location
F. Oil Fill Location
I. Battery
6-9
: :
Remove the hood prop
from the slot in the hood
and return the prop to
its retainer.
Then just pull the hood
down and close it firmly.
Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and
put the hood prop into the slotin the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
6-10
The engine oildipstick is a yellow ring.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
6-11
When to Add Oil
What Kind of Oil to Use
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacitiesand Specifications’’
in the Index.
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. Thissymbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (APT). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
~
NOTICE:
~~
~
~~~
~~~~~~~
Don’t add too much oil.If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range,your engine couldbe damaged.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-12
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
LOOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 1OW-30 if it’s going
numbers on an oil
to be 0°F (-18°C) or above. These
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
NOTICE:
7
“F
“C
c 100 -
t 38
+80.
t 21
+60.
t 16
+40.
t b
+20.
-7
0-
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@ oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
- 18
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil oran SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold startingand better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
I
COLD
WEATHM
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANYOTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-13
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealeris ready
to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short tripkity
maintenance schedule:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or usea carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or othercommercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engineoil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
6-14
If none of them is true, use the long triphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first.Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil containscertain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer?Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing orrags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sureto drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center forhelp.
Engine Cover
Removing the Engine Cover
1. Move both front seats as far back as they will go.
3. The nuts are located at the bottom of the extension
on the driver’s and passenger’s side corners.
2. Remove the instrument panel extension by removing
the two nuts that secure it in place.
6-15
4. Unscrew the screws located near the top on each side
of the extension. Grasp the extension from both sides
and gently remove it.
6-16
5. Disconnect the electrical connectors and set the
extension aside.
6. Grasp the top of the heater duct and pull down gently
to remove it.
7. Remove the two bolts at the engine cover. The bolts
are not supposed to come out of the cover, only from
the front of the dash.
When removing the cover, be careful not to damage
the instrument panel or the trim.
6-17
Installing the Engine Cover
1. Lift the engine cover into the vehicle and slide it all
the way forward. Make sure the rubber seal is over
the latches.
2. Install the two bolts at the engine cover.
3. Put the heater duct over the engine cover studs. Push
up on the duct gently until it snaps intoplace.
4. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
8. Grasp the bottom of the cover and slide it rearward.
Then, lift it up and out of the vehicle.
6-18
5. Install the engine cover extensionby gently
squeezing the sides and sliding it into place.
Make sure all of the fastener clips engage and the
extension fits properly in place.Replace and tighten
the two screws.
6. Install the two nuts to secure the extension in place.
4ir Cleaner
See “Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner
off
can causeyou or othersto be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame
if
the engine backfires.If it isn’t there,and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with itoff, and be careful workingon the
engine with the air cleaner
off.
To remove the air filter, lift the hood, unsnap both clips
and remove the top. After changing the filter, snap both
clips to secure the air cleaner. Be sure the air cleaner lid
is correctly positioned to seal out dust and contaminants
that are harmful to your engine.
Make sure the fresh air hose is still attached after the
filter change.
I NOTICE:
If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can cause
a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get
into your engine, which
will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filterand the crankcase ventilation filter.
-
6-19
Automatic TransmissionFluid
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
NOTICE:
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90 O F (32 ” C ) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
~
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some
of
the fluid could come out and fall
on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
How to Check
0
While pulling a trailer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
6-20
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Checking Transmission Fluid Hot
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F ( 10°C)' drivethe
vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperaturegage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures.
Checking Transmission FluidCold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used
only as a reference.Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperaturesare 50°F (10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F (lO°C), you may have
to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check,you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Hot or
Cold
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
6-21
Then, without shutting ofT the engine, follow these steps:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a
cold check or in the HOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-22
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Mainterl‘ance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluidHOT.
(A COLD check is used only asa reference.) If the fluid
level is low, add only enough of the proper fluidto bring
the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t
take.much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5 L).
Don P overjill.
I NOTICE:
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, they have two additional systems that
need lubrication.
-
We recommend youuse only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that label is
made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other thanDEXRON-I11
is not coveredby your new vehicle warranty.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections’’ in the Index.
6-23
How to Check Lubricant
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
If the level is below the bottom of the fillerplug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level tothe bottom of the fillerplug hole.
What to Use
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See“Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-24
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Rear Axle
WhattoUse
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
.
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with new
is designed
DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explainsyour cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see“Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant for
your vehicle will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
6-25
What to Use
I
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that
you use
only DEX-COOL’ (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other thanDEX-COOL’ is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) o r 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused
by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Use a mixture of one-half clean wuter (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
--
6-26
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,o r some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will, Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant
mix. With
plain water or the wrong
mix, your engine could
get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat
warning. Your engine could catch fire and
you or
others could be burned,
Use a 50/50 mix of clean
water and DEX-COOL@ antifreeze.
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn’t be covered
by your
warranty. Too much water in themix can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives
which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
ADD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.
6-27
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not
to spill it.
I
A CAUTION:
A
I
:
I
'hrning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly.
you will almost
With the coolant recovery tank,
at the radiator.
never have to add coolant
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
little when the engineand radiator arehot.
--
6-28
--
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and itwill burn if the engine partsare hot
enough. Don't spill coolant ona hot engine.
Radiator Pressure Cap
I NOTICE:
~~
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed
to prevent coolant loss and possible engine
damage from overheating.Be sure the arrowson
the cap lineup with the overflow tubeon the
radiator filler neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure cap, a GM cap
is recommended.
6-29
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
Power Steering Fluid
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap
and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap
and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again
and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
6-30
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
NOTICE:
0
0
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap labeled
WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system.Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansionif freezing occurs,
which could damage the tankif it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
6-31
Brakes
Brake Fluid
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner orlater your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings areworn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
If you have too much brake
fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluidwill burn if the engine
is hot enough.You or others couldbe burned,
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings areput in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake
fluid only when work is doneon the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
@
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap beforeremoving it. This will help keep
dirt from entering thereservoir.
You can check the brake fluidwithout taking off the cap.
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even workat all. This could causea
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Just look at the window on the brake fluid reservoir. The
fluid levelshould be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your
brake system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above MIN and below the top
of the window.
6-33
NOTICE:
0
0
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
a few
brake system parts. For example, just
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system partsso badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
go or be heard all thetime your vehicle is moving (except
when you are pushing on the brake pedalfirmly).
A CAUThN:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake padshave built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brakepads are
worn and new padsare needed. The sound may come and
6-34
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean somethim is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation.When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake Adjustment
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums
should be removed and inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. When you have the
front brakes replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
backing up and firmly applyingthe brakes a few times.
Brake linings shouldalways be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection’’ in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be sign
a of brake trouble.
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expectcan change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
6-35
Battery
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time
for anew battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas
that canexplode. You can be badly hurtif you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
6-36
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealer service department.
Before replacing any bulbs, make sure all lamps are off
and the vehicle is not running. See “Replacement Bulbs”
in the Index.
Halogen Bulbs
I A CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
You or
can burstif you drop or scratch the bulb.
others could be injured.Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
I
2. Pull the connector out
and unplug the lamp.
Headlamps
Sealed Beam Lamps
1. Remove the four retainer
screws and the retainer.
3. Install the new bulb into the connector.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.
6-37
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
3. Completely remove the sidemarkedturn signal lamp
by pulling out the assembly and disconnecting the
sidemarkedturn signal lamp sockets from the lamp.
6-38
4. Remove the screw
located behind the
corner reflector in order
to remove the entire
corner reflector.
5. Remove the remaining three screws; the first one
from the corner reflector pocket and the two
remaining from the composite assembly.
6-39
6. Remove the
composite assembly.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove the two screws at the inside edge of the
parking/turn signal lamp assembly.
2. Remove the
lamp assembly.
3. Squeeze the tab on the
side of the lamp socket
while turning the socket
counterclockwise.
7. Turn the halogen bulb counterclockwise toremove
from the assembly.
8. Install the new bulb into thecomposite assembly by
turning it clockwise until it iscompletely tightened.
9. Replace the composite assembly by installing and
tightening all of the screws previously removed.
4. Pull the socket out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket.
6. Gently push the new bulb into the socket.
7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
it clockwise until it locks.
8. Put the parkinghrn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle and tighten the screws.
6-40
Taillamps
1. Open the rear door.
2. Remove the two screws
from behind the door.
3. Pull out the taillamp assembly so youcan see the socket.
6-41
4. Press the tab and
turn the socket
counterclockwise to
remove the socket
from the bezel.
If the socket does not
have a tab, turn the
socket counterclockwise
to remove the socket
from the bezel.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the taillamp.
6-42
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
To replace your windshield
wiper blade inserts, lift
the wiper arm away from
the windshield.
Pinch the two tabs on the wiper arm and slide the insert
out of the blade. Slide the new one in place. Make
sure the tabs are locked into position. See “Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index for the
proper type of replacement blade.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires madeby
a leadingtire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your warranty booklet for details.
I
1
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires cancause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could havean air-out anda serious
accident. See “LoadingYour Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires.The resulting accident
could causeserious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
--
6-43
Inflation
-- Tire Pressure
The CertificationRire label,which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get thefollowing:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too
much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
0 Unusualwear
0 Bad handling
Roughride
0 Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to putthe valve caps backon the valve stems.
They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-44
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
( 10 000 to 1 3 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires’’ and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Don’t include thecompact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certificatioflire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
Rust or dirt on wheel,
a
o r on the parts to which
it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where wheel
the
attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency,you can
use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be
sure touse a scraper orwire brush later,if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirtoff. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
~
6-45
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
0
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0
You can see cord orfabric showing through the tire’s
rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut orsnagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
6-46
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certificationrnire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
1 /r\ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could causeyou to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not
handle properly, andyou could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the
all wheels.
same size and type tires on
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
vehicle.
though. It was developed for use on your
Uniform TireQuality Grading
The following informationrelates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration,which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-productiontires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
6-47
Traction
-- A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, €3,and
C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditionson
specified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature
-- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
6-48
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
GM dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one itreplaces.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometeror
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicleground clearance and tireor tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
A CAUTIO, .:
-
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect thebraking and handlingof your
vehicle, make your tires loseair and makeyou lose
control. You could have a collision in which you or
others could be injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts for replacement.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
1
A CAU JON:
I
Putting a used wheel onyour vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or
how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.
6-49
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/65R15size tires, don’t
use tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
If you have othersize tires, use tire chains
only
where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper
size for yourtires. Install them on the rear axle
as possible with
tires and tighten them as tightly
the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.If
you can hear the chains contacting your
vehicle,
stop and retighten them.
If the contact continues,
slow down until itstops. Driving too fast or
spinning thewheels with chains onwill damage
your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to cleanyour vehicle:
0
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
0
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Acetone
a Paint Thinner
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
0
NailPolish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Laundry Soap
5. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire
area immediately or it will set.
Bleach
Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric
Reducing Agents
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Alcohol
0
4. Use solvent-type cleaners in awell-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner oftento get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, dampcloth.
Your GM dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot
lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on
vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaningtips:
1. Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the
directions on the container label.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
2. Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel
or cloth.
3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer.
9. Wipe with a clean cloth.
6-51
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.
Some spots and stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
Special Cleaning Problems
If you need to use a solvent:
Greasy or Oily Stains
1. Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with
a clean, dull knife or scraper.
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe
polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows:
2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the
outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center.
3. Keep changing to a clean sectionof the cloth.
4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately
dry the area with a blow dryer tohelp prevent a
cleaning ring.
Fabric Protection
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet that has been
treated with Scotchgard“ Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keep it looking new.
6-52
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left
on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They should be removed as
soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will
dissolve them and may cause them to spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit,
fruit
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit,urine and blood can
be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaningvomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
I. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry.
Rub with a clean, damp clothto remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
0
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you
don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
vinylfieather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soapand wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leathercleaner. See your
dealer for thisproduct.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If
dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm
the leather.
3. If a stain remains, clean itwith solvent-type cleaner.
6-53
C- -7ing the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to cleanthe top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containingsilicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts
or the built-in
child restraint harness.If you do, they may be
severely weaken. In a crash, they might not be
able to provide adequate protection. Clean the
safety belts and the child restraint harness only
with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning the Built-in Child Restraint
Your built-in child restraint may be cleaned with mild
soap and lukewarm water. Don’t use household cleaners.
They may weaken the harness ordamage plastic parts.
The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the child
restraint cushion and seatback with fastener strips.You
can remove the pad, machine wash it in cold water on a
gentle cycle and tumble dry it on a low heat setting.
Never bleach or iron the pad, and don’t dry clean it.
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint
Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint
harness clean and dry.
6-54
L
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleanjng the Outside of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami@ Powder
(non-scratching glass cleaning powder),GM Part
No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not
form when you rinse it with water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone greasewith a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See“Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace worn blades.
6-55
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finishis to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct raysof the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soaps.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, orthey could stain.Dry the finishwith a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
Use lukewarmor cold water, a soft cloth anda liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soapto clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials’’
in the Index.)
6-56
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat
paint finish.
I NOTICE:
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish
may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Cleaning Tires
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainlesssteel trim, if necessary.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, neveruse auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metalparts.
Aluminum Wheels(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, abrasive cleanersor abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage the surface.
NOTICE:
When applyinga tire dressing always take care
to
wipe off any oversprayor splash from all painted
surfaces on the bodyor wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic carwash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damagethe surface of these wheels.
6-57
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
~
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
UnderbodyMaintenance
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control 12 months or 12,000miles (20 000 km)of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
can collect on the underbody.If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though theyhave corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
I'
6-59
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
your VIN,
the model designation,
0
paint information and
0
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VTN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the front storage
compartment door. It’s very helpful if you ever need to
order parts. On this label is:
6-60
Add-on Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check withyour dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by
your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working
as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’ in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breakerin
the lamp switch.An electrical overloadwill cause the
lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers
and fusible thermal links. Thisgreatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse.If the motor overheats dueto heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload iscaused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breakeropens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace abad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Spare fusesand a fuse puller are located in the
underhood electrical center. You can remove fuses with
the fuse puller. Remember to replace any of the spare
fuses you use, so you will have some if you ever need
them again.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse,you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: one is inside
the vehicle and one is in the engine compartment.
6-61
Instrument Panel FuseBlock
The fuse block is on the lower portion of the instrument
panel on the driver's side.
6-62
m
6
12
E 7
E 7
C57
c7
11
4
10
c7
17
3
9
cI1 c 7
2
1 7
1
E 7
18
24
E 7
c -7
17
23
c;7
16
r"I1
15
21
c7 c7
t3 t 7
20
c83 c147 c 7
7
c7
13
13
19
c7
m
FuseKircuit
Breaker
Usage
. . . . . . . . . Stop/Turn/Hazard Lamps, CHMSL,
Chime Module
. . . . . . . . . Not Used
. . . . . . . . . Courtesy Lamps, Power Outside
Mirrors, Glove Box Lamp, Dome
Reading Lamps, Vanity Mirror Lamps
4 . . . . . . . . . DRL Relay, DRL Module, Chime
Headlamp Switch, Keyless Entry,
Cluster, Overhead Console, EVO
Module, Interior Lamps Module
FuseKircuit
Breaker
5 .........
6 .........
7 .........
8 .........
9 .........
10 . . . . . . . .
11
*
e
.
e
,
e
e
.
12 . . . . . . . .
13 . . . . . . . .
14 . . . . . . . .
Usage
Not Used
Cruise Module, Cruise Control Switch
Power Outlets, DLC,
Subwoofer Amplifier
Starter Enable Relay
License Plate Lamp, Taillamps,
Parking Lamps, Ashtray Lamp, Panel
Lights, TrailerTaillamps, Front and
Rear Sidemarker Lamps, Door Switch
Illumination, Headlamp Switch
Illumination, Rear Seat Audio
Illumination
Air Bag System
Wiper Motor, Washer Pump,
Upfitter Relay Coil
L, MI, M2 Blower Motor, Rear A/C
Relay Coil, Front Cont. Temp. Door
Motor, Hi Blower Relay, Defogger
Timer Coil
Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock Switches
Cluster HVAC Controls, Chime Module,
Radio Illumination, Rear Heat Switch
Illumination, RearWipermasher Switch
Illumination, Rear Liftgate Switch
Illumination, Remote Cassette
Illumination, OH Console
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
Usage
15 . . . . . . . . DRL Diode
16 . . . . . . . . Front Turn Signals, Rear Turn Signals,
Trailer Turn Signals, Back-up Lamps,
BTSI Solenoid
17 . . . . . . . . Radio: ATC (Standby), 2000 Series
(Main Feed), Rear Seat Audio Controls
18 . . . . . . . . VCM-Ign 3, VCM- Brake, 4WAL,
Cruise StepperMotol
19 . . . . . . . . Radio: ATC (Main Feed),
2000 Series (Standby)
20 . . . . . . . . PRNDLI Odometer, TCC Enable and
PWM Solenoids, ShiftA and Shift B
Solenoids, 3-2 Downshift Solenoids
21 . . . . . . . . Not Used
22 . . . . . . . . Not Used
23 . . . . . . . . Rear Wiper, Rear Washer Pump
24 . . . . . . . . Not Used
A . . . . . . . . . (Circuit Breaker) Power Door Lock
Relay, 6-way Power Seat, Remote
Control Door Lock Receiver, Dutch
Door Module, Dutch Door Release
B . . . . . . . . . (Circuit Breaker)Power Windows
6-63
Underhood Electrical Center
(
7
)
( 7 1
(
7
)
(TI
(
7
)
--EKE
_73
;;z
Usage
The underhood electrical center
islocated toward the
rear of the engine compartment on the driver's side.
Lift the hood and open the cover to gain access to this
fuse block.
6-64
(-1
000
1-(
(
(-1
) (-)
(-)
(-)
m
(
,
,
,
,
,
I
I
)
Feed
AUX B . . . . . . . . . . . Upfitter Battery Feed
AUX A . . . . . . . . . . . . Upfitter Ignition Feed
Relay
A/C Relay
IGN Relay
Starter Enable Relay
A/C Enable Relay
Empty Relay
Fuel Pump Relay
FuseKircuit Breaker Usage
UPFIT-BATT . . . . . . . Upfitter Battery Power Stud,
Trailer Wiring Harness
UPFIT-IGN . . . . . . . . Upfitter Ignition Relay
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not used
Fuse Puller*
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not used
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not used
ECM-B . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Pump Relay, VCM,
Oil Pressure Switch/Sender
HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn Relay
A/C COMP . . . . . . . . . A/C Enable Relay
RRDEFOG . . . . . . . . Heater-A/C Control Selector
Switch
ENG-I . . . . . . . . . . . . Oxygen Sensors 1-4,
Camshaft Position Sensor,
Mass Air Flow Sensor,
Evaporative Emission
Canister Purge Solenoid
Valve, Linear EGR Valve
Solenoid, VCM
FuseKircuit Breaker Usage
IGN-E . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C Enable Relay
ECM-I . . . . . . . . . ~. Fuel Injectors 1-6,
Crankshaft Position Sensor,
VCM, Distributor Ignition
Control Module
LIGHTING . . . . . . . . Park Lamps Fuse, DRL Fuse,
Headlamp and Panel
Dimmer Switch
BATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/P Fuse Block Fuses, Power
Seat CB, Stop/Hazard Fuse,
Auxiliary Power Fuse,
Cigarette Lighter Fuse,
Radio, Battery Fuse
IGNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Relay, Ignition Switch
IGN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Switch
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Pressure Module Valve
A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Motor Resistor,
Blower Relay
RR HTR/AC . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Heater A/C Relay
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not used
*A fuse puller is included in the underhood electrical
center. You will also find spare fuses.
6-65
Replacement Bulbs
Engine Specifications
Exterior
Lamps
Quantity
Trade
No.
Halogen Headlamps Sealed Beam
2
H6054
Halogen Headlamps Composite
2
9006 (Low Beam)
Halogen Headlamps Composite
2
9005 (High Beam)
Parking, Turn
Signal Lamps
2
3 157NA
Rear, Stoplamps
2
2057
Sidemarker Lamps
4
194
Back-up Lamps
2
1156
*Sequential Fuel Injection
Wheel Nut Torque
Capacities and Specifications
All capacities are approximate. English and metric
conversions are given.
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
6-66
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300 V6 SFI*
RPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L35
Firing Order ......................
1-6-5-4-3-2
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm
Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195“F (9 1 “ C )
Base or Optional Wheel . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N-m)
Tire Pressures . . . . . . . . . See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
Cooling System Capacity
Quantity”
without Rear Heater
Quantity*
with Rear Heater
13.5 quarts (12.8 L)
16.5 quarts (15.5 L)
After refill, the level must be checked.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
Crankcase Capacity
Quantity* with Filter . . . . . Quantity*
. . . . . . 4.5 quarts
(4.3 L)
System
After refill, the level must be checked. Do not overfill.
Type
R- 134a
C-60**
2 Ibs. (0.91 kg)
Fuel Tank Capacity
R- 134a
C-(j9***
3 lbs. (1.36 kg)
Standard Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 gallons (90 L)
*All quantities are approximate.
Transmission Capacity
Automatic Transmission
(Drain and Refill) . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Front Axle Capacity
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 2.6 pint (1.2 L)
Rear Axle Capacity
Standard Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 pint (1.7 L)
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 pint (1.7 L)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants arethe same.
If the air conditioningsystem in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer.
**Front A/C only.
***Front and Rear A/C.
I NOTICE:
I
R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12
refrigerant inan air conditioning system. R-12 in
an R-134a systemwill cause compressor failure,
refrigerant oil sludgeor poor air conditioning
system performance.
Refrigerant should be added only by a qualified
A/C technician.
6-67
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are
based on the latest information available at the time of
printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this
manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle
when it was built, or if you have any questions, please
contact your GM truck dealer.
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF52
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A1 163C
Positive Crankcase
Ventilation (PCV) Valve . . . . . . . . AC Type CV774C
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 4 1-932
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.060 inches ( 1.52 mm)
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type GF48 1
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 1255 1472
Wiper Blades (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . Trico 221 10158,
Pin Type
18 inches (45.7 cm)Length
Wiper Blade (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trico 22 154396,
Pin Type
14 inches (35.5cm) Length
6-68
Vehicle Dimensions*
Overall Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189.8 inches (482 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77.5 inches (196.8 cm)
Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76.2 inches (193.5 cm)
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 11.2 inches (282.4 cm)
Front Tread Width . . . . . . . . . 65.1 inches (165.4 cm)
Rear Tread Width . . . . . . . . . . 65.1 inches ( 1 65.4 cm)
*Figures reflect base equipment only.
Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers themaintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these servicesto retain its safety,
dependability and emission controlperformance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Short Trip/City Definition
Short Trip/City Intervals
Long Trip/Highway Definition
7-6
7-7
7-30
7-43
7-47
7-49
7-5 1
Long TripIHighway Intervals
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
Introduction
I
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
IMPORTANT:
I
Plan I
I protection
Have you purchcrsed the GM Protection Plcrn? The Plarz
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet,or your
GM dealer for details.
7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealership’s service department or another
qualified service centerdo these jobs.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspectionsthat your GM dealership’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous.In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment
for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place
for you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists
some products GM recommends to help keep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
Publications’‘ in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at GeneralMotors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distancesall the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive itto work, to do errands orin many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checksand replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
section and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good
condition, see your GMdealer.
This part tells you the maintenance servicesyou should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer foryour service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricantsto use are listed inPart D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All
parts should be replaced andall necessary repairs done
before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationmire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle’’
in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is
right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:
Maintenance Schedule
Short Trip/City Definition
Intervals
Trip/City
Short
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons ~ O Lshould,follow
I
this schedule ifyou
operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is thnt
these conditions cause engine oil to brenk down sooneK
I
Short TripKity Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive
Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
-
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Front
Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (orat each brake
relining, whichever occurs first).Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement. Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and
Lines Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervnls only sunznznrize muintenance services.
Be sure to follow the comnplete rnainterzance schedule
on the followkg pages.
7-5
Maintenance Schedule
Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of
the conditions fromthe Short TripKity Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Use the Short TripKity schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with fully
a
warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oilto break
down slower:
7-6
Every 7,500 Miles(12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every I2 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Front
Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only) (or ateach brake
relining, whichever occurs first). Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank,
Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles(240 000km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervalsonly summarize rncrintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule
on the following pages.
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’ following.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection’’ under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspection” in Part C of this schedule.
Drive axle service (see “RecommendedFluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
:%*
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change. At subsequentoil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in
dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
0
More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty use.
Footnotes
‘f The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints and kingpin
bushings, steering linkageand transfer case shift
linkage, parking brake cable guides, and brake
pedal springs.
7-7
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km,)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for lealung. (See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY
I
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVIChu B Y
I
ShortWip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An EInission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
BY:
7-9
I Short lkip/City MaintenanceSchedule I
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnotef.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
7-10
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditiorzs, change the jluid und.filterevery
30,000 rniles (50 000 km).
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Em.ission Control Service.
I
El Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnotea*.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote *?)
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
I
DATE
I
SERVICED B Y
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
I
I
7-11
I Short TkipKity Maintenance Schedule 1
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote#.)
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
7-12
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short 6iplCity Maintenance Schedule
I
30,000 Miles (50000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
17 Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote * * .)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack thefront wheel bearings (orat
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transmissionfluid and
filter if the vehicleis mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
(Continued)
7-13
I Short ’MplCity Maintenance Schedule I
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as foundin taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not
useyour vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change thefluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
I3 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
7-14
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote* *.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Sewice.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BYJ
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Checkconstant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-15
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
42,000 Miles (70000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
45,000 Miles (75000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
3 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
7 Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (orevery
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfkont axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
fluid as needed.Check constant velocity
axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
(See footnote ** .)
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
pattern and additional information.
and repack thefront wheel bearings (orat
(See footnote +.)
each brake relining, whicheveroccurs first).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or moreof these conditions:
I
7-16
I
I
I
I Short TripKity MaintenanceSchedule I
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
If you do not useyour vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change thefluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
0Inspect air cleaner filterif you are drivingin
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote-t..)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfi-ont axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand
axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
SERVICED BY:
7-17
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
51,000 Miles (85000 km)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
c]Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Checkconstant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check rearhont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote* *.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
7-18
DATE
I
ACTUALMILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule I
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehiclesonly: Clean
and repackthe front wheel bearings (orat
each brake relining, whichever occurs fist).
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
(Continued)
7-19
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
40,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
- In heavy city traffic where theoutside
temperature regularly reaches90O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such asfound in taxi, police or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the$uid and filter every
30,000miles (50 000 km).
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect fuel tank, cap and linesfor damage
or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replaceparts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index forproper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
El Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
7-20
SERVICED B Y
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0Change
0Change engine oil and filter(or every
engine oil and filter(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or
every
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote** .)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and addfluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote+.)
L
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
1
SERVICED BY:
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
BY:
7-21
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
1
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Sewice.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
7-22
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity jointsand
axle seals for leaking.( S e e footnote ** .)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
75,000 Miles (125000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
-
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change thefluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
c7 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehiclesonly: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
necessary. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for lealung.
(See footnote **.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
BY:I
7-23
E
t TripKity Maintenance Schedule I
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (orevery
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking.(Seefootnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE
7-24
BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
87,000 Miles (145000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or e7Jery
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level
and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote
**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-25
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
JI
Lubricate chassiscomponents (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Checkconstant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repackthe front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whicheveroccurs first).
7-26
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90 F
(32 C ) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as foundin taxi, police or
delivery service.
O
O
If you do not use your vehicle underany of these
conditions, changethe fluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
I ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule I
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
CI Change engine oil and filter (or every
(See footnote"f)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
An Emission ControlService.
0Rotate tires. See "Tire Inspection and
Rotation" in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
BY:
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
I
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
99,000 Miles (165000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
CI Lubricate chassis components(or every
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking.( S e e footnote **.)
c]Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Checkconstant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
DATE
7-28
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
CI Inspect spark
CI Drain, flush and refillcooling system
plug wires.
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling
system and pressurecap.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation
( P c v ) valve. An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE
I
I
SERVICED BY:
I
I
7-29
Long TriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
( 166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) atthe same intervals. Theservices shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the sameinterval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints and kingpin
See “Owner Checksand Services” and“Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection”under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
Footnotes
** Drive axle service (see “Recommended Fluids and
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure toperform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emissionwarranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
7-30
bushings, steering linkage and transfer case shift
linkage, parking brake cable guides, and brake
pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use):
0
0
Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
engine oil change.At subsequent oil changes, check
fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
fluid asneeded at every engine oil change.
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote
* *.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additionalinformation.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote * *.)
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or moreof these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where theoutside
temperature regularly reaches90 OF
(32 O C) or higher.
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:^
(Continued)
n 3-1
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change thefluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for lealung. (See footnote* *.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I LongTrip/HighwayMaintenance
Schedule
1
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or
every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
El Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Checkconstant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehiclesonly: Clean
and repack thefront wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32 O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
I f you do not useyour vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change the
fluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
(Continued)
n mm
I
Long Trip/Highwav Maintenance Schedule
1
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) (Continued)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Replace air cleanerfilter.
An Emission Control Service.
~~
DATE
7-34
ACTUAL MILEAGE
~~
SERVICED B Y
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote #.)
17 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
1,ong Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote **.)
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90”F
(32°C) or higher.
-
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change thefluid and*filterevery
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED B Y
7-35
II,ongTriplHighway Maintenance Schedule
I
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
engine oil andfilter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components(or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.
(See footnote * * .)
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repackthe front wheel bearings (orat
each brake relining, whichever occursfirst).
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
7-36
In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90O F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
-
If you do not useyour vehicle under any of these
conditions, change thefluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
0Inspect
engine accessory drive belt.
Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
0Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission ControlService.
13 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0Rotate
tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote+.)
7-37
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
67,500Miles (112 500 km)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engine oil andfilter (or every
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first).
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate
chassis components (or every
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
axle seals for leaking.(See footnote **.)
joints and axle seals forleaking.
(See footnote ** .)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
0Change automatic transmission fluid and
pattern and additional information.
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under
(See footnote +.)
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
BY:
temperature regularly reaches90 O F
(32°C) or higher.
I
7-38
I
ISERVICED
I
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
delivery service.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
I f you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
I
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
ISERVICED
.
12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
El Check readfiont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote**.)
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
BEI
7-39
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components (or every
1
12 months, whicheveroccurs first).
(See footnote#.)
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle sealsfor leaking.
(See footnote **.)
For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
andrepack the front wheelbearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
CJ Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicleis mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32 C ) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, policeor
delivery service.
O
If you do not
useyour vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
30,000 miles (50 000 km).
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote?.)
CI Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
El Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
Cl Lubricate chassis components (orevery
12 months, whichever occursfirst).
(See footnote #.)
0Check readfkont axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
El Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation
pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
7-41
100,000 Miles (I66 000 km)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0Inspect spark plug wires.
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first).See “Engine
Coolant” in the Indexfor what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressurecap.
An Emission ControlService.
0Replace
sparkplugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0Inspect.Positive Crankcase Ventilation
(Pcv)valve. An Emission ControlSewice.
An Emission Control Service.
.
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED
BY:
-
DATE
I
ACTUAL MILEAGE
SERVICED BY
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL@
coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant”in the
Index for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluidsor lubricants are added to your
as shown
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
per&orm these underhood checksat each fuel fill.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid levelin the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid
if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” in the Index for further details.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper
oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should
be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems’’
in the Index
for further details.
7-43
At Least %ice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child
restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps,
latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged
safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If
you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-in
child restraint system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts or harness
straps replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-44
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission’’ in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, the body hood, fuel
door and rear compartment hinges, latches and locks
including interior glove box and console doors, andany
moving seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever
pivot and prop rod pivot. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequentlubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
I
A CAUTION:
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
I
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter worksin any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, youor others couldbe
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-45
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Ransmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
0
The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
0
The key should come out onlyin LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
I A CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could beginto move. You or others could be
injured andproperty could be damaged. Make
sure thereis room infront of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once shouldthe vehicle begin to move.
7-46
I
0
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove footpressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
0
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall). You should let your GM dealership’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a GM service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions ‘whichcould
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Throttle Linkage Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding,
and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
i;.
7-47
Drive Axle Service
Brake System Inspection
Check readfront axlefluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocity joints and axle seals forleaking.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
or conditionsresult in frequent braking.
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary.
Oil the control lever pivot point and all exposed control
linkage. Check vent hose at transfer case forkinks and
proper installation.
7-48
!‘
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
USAGE
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine,see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) andGM
or
Goodwrench@
DEX-COOL
Havoline@ DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) antifreeze. See
“Engine Coolant’’ in the Index.
TM
Coolant
Supplement
Sealer
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid Hydra
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
@
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from your
GM dealer.
I
FLUIDLUBRICANT
GM Part No. 3634621or
equivalent with a complete flush
and refill.
- _
System
Parking Brake Chassis lubricant (GM Part
Cable Guides
No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Chassis
Chassis lubricant (GM Part
or
Lubrication No. 1052497 or equivalent)
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
7-49
I
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Front Wheel
Bearings
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI ## 2,
Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1051344 or equivalent).
Differential,
Front and Rear
Axle
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052271) or SAE8OW-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
I Transfer Case
Windshield
Washer Solvent
7-50
DEXRON@-111Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
I
USAGE
I
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate lubricant aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI ## 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@
(GM Part No. 12346241
or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 orequivalent).
~
See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended
replacement filters, valves and spark plugs.
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed,record the
date, odometer readingand who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checksand
Services” or “PeriodicMaintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-51
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
SERVICED
READING
DATE
7-52
BY
MAINTENANCE
PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevroletif you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Address forWriting to Chevrolet/Geo
Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program
Phone Number for RoadsideAssistance
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation
BBB Autoline Information
8- 10
8-10
8-1 1
8-11
8-1 1
8- 12
8-13
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Reporting Safety Defects to Canada
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service Publications in Canada
How to Order Service Publications
Order Form for ServicePublications
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the Sales, Service or Parts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
General Manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
InMexico: (525) 625-3256
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-41 35
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
In theBahamas:1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-01 22
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-13 15
In other overseas locations, call GM North American
Export Sales
in Canada at: (905) 644-41 12.
... .:.
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
0
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL1 H 8P7
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance forText
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet/Geo Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days ayear, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy" Cure:
0
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
e Free towing for warranty repairs
0
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie.,
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo RoadsideAssistance
Center. As the owner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo,
membership in Roadside Assistance is free.
ROADSIDE Courtesy" Care PROVIDES:
a Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above)
Plus:
a FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
a FREE LocksmithKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
0
FREE Flat Tire Service (spareinstalled on the road)
a FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
a FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with
the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers
of 1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger car and light duty
trucks. (Please see your selling dealer fordetails.)
Note: Courtesy Cure is available to Retail and Retail Lease
Customers operating 1997 and newer Chevrolet/Geo
vehicles for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet/Geo
dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center
brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisorswill explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
0
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Pleaserefer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergencyservices.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the
coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New
Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of
1997 Chevrolet/Geo passenger cars and light duty
trucks (please see your selling dealer for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during the same day.
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any
overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieuof
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer
service management, Claim amounts should reflect
all actual costs.
8-8
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part
of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make
any changes or discontinueCourtesy Transportation
at any time without notification.
0 For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are
under 2 1 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $30/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details. TheRoadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
0
In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet. General
Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in
this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealerare committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE,but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an
intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligible customersmay present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decisionwhich you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decisionis made.
Some statelaws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comeswith a separatewarranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITEDSTATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a groupof vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Wslshington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In C-anada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
1908 ColonelSam Drive
has a safety defect,you should immediately notify
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited.You may write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this,
we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please callus at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
other service literature are available for purchase for all
current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, Michigan 48007-7047
8-11
1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehiclecan be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals havethe diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publicationsare written directly for Ownersand
intended to provide basic operational information about
the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule forall models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual providesinformation on unit repair service
procedures, adjustmentsand specifications for the
1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$1 5.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technicalservice information needed
to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors carsand trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
-I€ FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated P.U. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications areavailable for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model nameof the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-Mastercard-Discover)
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356
1-800-782-4356.Material cannot be returned for credit
without packing slip
with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders
Only
1-313-865-5927
against the original order.
VEHICLE MODEL
PUBLICATION FORM
TOTAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
QTY‘ PRICE
NUMBER
NAME
YEA
EACH*
ORDER TOLL FREE
s,
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1
9
9
7
Manual
Service
1997
$90.00
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1997
$40.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1997
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
1997
5.00
$1
$10.00
G
-
s
H
P
T
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(STATE)
(ZIPCODE)
I
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
\
\
1
AREA CODE
GIVI-CHE-ORD~~ *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
Check or Money
Order payableto
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only - do not send cash.)
P
U.S. Order
Processing
$5.00
A 0Mastercard
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
Y c]VISA
I GRANDTOTAL I
M UDiscover
3
E Account
Number: UIn
U I I IUIn
N Expiration
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
Date mo/yr:
address shown.
T
lrm
mml
-
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U S . funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in US. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $115 0 plus the
U S . order processing.
b
8-14
NOTES
Section 9 Index
Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 1
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.28.2.61
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-32
What Makes it Intlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 I
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
AirCleanerFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
3-5
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.22.6.23
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
Antenna. Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Anti-Lock
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64.4.7
Anti.Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
6-59
Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic
Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LockingRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
3-9
7-44
6-20
2-19
6-24
2-22
6-25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Wdrnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
BBB AutoLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Brake
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
9-1
Brakes. Anti-Lock ...............................
Braking ........................................
Braking in Emergencies ...........................
Break.In. New Vehicle ..........................
BTSICheck ...................................
Bulb Replacement ..............................
Built-in Child Restraint ..........................
4-7
4-6
4-9
2- 15
7-45
6-36
1-44
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications ......................
6-67
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . 2.27.2.28.2.30.4.27.4.34.4.35
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
7-43
Cassette Deck Service ...........................
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 11. 3. 13
3-29
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................
1-39
Center Passenger Position ........................
Certificatioflire Label ..........................
4-28
4-34
Chains.Safety .................................
6-50
Chains.Tire ...................................
Changing a Flat Tire .............................
5-23
2-6 1
Charging System Light ..........................
2-68
Check Gages Light ..............................
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
6-58
Chemical Paint Spotting ..........................
1-53
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.41.1.42.1.43.
Care .......................................
6-54
6-54
Cleaning ....................................
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
9-2
Top Strap ...................................
1-54
WheretoPut ...........................
1-53.1-54
2-50
Cigarette Lighter ...............................
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-61
6-19
Cleaner. Air Filter ..............................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ............................
6-57
6-54
Built-in Child Restraint ........................
6-55
Exterior LampsLenses ........................
Fabric ......................................
6-52
Glass Surfaces ............................... 6-54
6-51
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
Instrumentpanel .............................
6-54
Leather .....................................
6-53
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-55
6-52
Special Problems .............................
Stains ......................................
6-52
6-57
Tires .......................................
6-53
Vinyl .......................................
Wheels .....................................
6-57
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
3-9
Clock, Setting the ................................
3-2
Comfort Controls ................................
Compact Disc Care .............................
3-30
3-19, 3-24
Compact Disc Player .......................
5-35
Compact Spare Tire .............................
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
4-6
Convenience Net ............................... 2-49
2-42
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
Coolant .......................................
6-25
Heater, Engine ...............................
2-18
Recovery Tank ...............................
5-16
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5- I5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
8-8
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
2-38
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
5-3
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- IO. 8- 11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
3-8
Defogger.RearWindow ..........................
3-6
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
2-39
DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door
2-6
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
DrivePosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
1 - 18
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving
4-18
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-3
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
TnaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
In ForeignCountries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
4-16
IntheRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
4-22
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnSnowandIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-24
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18. 3-28. 6-60
ElectricalSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-60
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
2-18
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43
Coolant Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-43
5-13
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
6-66
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
TemperatureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-64
9-3
Engineoil ....................................
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking ...................................
Pressure Gage ................................
Used .......................................
Whentochange ..............................
Exhaust, Engine . . . . . . . 2-27,2-28,2-30,4-27,4-34,
Express-Down Window ..........................
6-11
6-12
6- 14
6-11
2-68
6-14
6-14
4-35
2-29
Fabric Cleaning................................
6-52
6-5
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fi 1ter
Air Cleaner Replacement .......................
6-68
6-68
Engine Oil Replacement .......................
6-56
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
FirstGear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Flashers, Hazard Warning .........................
5-2
5-23
Flat Tire. Changing .............................
6.66.6.67
Fluid Capacities ...........................
Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
..
11
French Language Manual ...........................
Front
6-24
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9. 5.10
Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
9-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries ...........................
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
6-3
6-5
2-69
6-4
2-18
6-61
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
2-64
2-67
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-69
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
4-28
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-42
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
4-28
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
..
Guide en Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
2-12
Hatch Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
1-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
3-6
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
High-Beam Headlamps ..........................
4-2 1
Highway Hypnosis ..............................
Hill and Mountain Roads .........................
4-22
4-34
Hitches. Trailer .................................
Hood
6-7
Checking Things Under .........................
6-10
Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
4-17
Hydroplaning ..................................
2. I 5
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
6-44
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
7-48
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7-47
Exhaust Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator and Heater Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
7-47
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-47
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2-39
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Jack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24
5-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Key Lock Cylinders Service ......................
7-44
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Labels
CertificationlTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
6-60
Service Parts Identification .....................
4-28
Tire-Loading information ......................
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
2-37
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Latches, Seatback ................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-25
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28, 2-61
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64, 4-7
Brake System Warning .........................
2-63
2-61
ChargingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-68
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
1- 13, 2-60
Safety Belt Reminder .....................
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
9-5
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
4-28
Locks
7-44
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door ........................................
2-6
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
PowerDoor ..................................
2-7
Sliding Door Child Security .....................
2- I I
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-49
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
7-44
Luggagecarrier ................................
2-49
1-3
LumbarControls ................................
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Maintenance Record ............................
7-5 1
Maintenance Schedule ............................
7- I
Long Trip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Long Tripmighway Intervals .....................
7-6
Owner Checks and Services .....................
7-43
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Short TripKity Definition .......................
7-5
Short TripKity Intervals ........................
7-5
6-58
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ......................
2-65
ManualFrontSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
ManualLumbarSupport ..........................
1-3
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Day/Night Rearview .....................
Outside .....................................
Visorvanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
2-42
2-41
2-41
2-52
6-3
vi
4-22
N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
2-21
2-15
4-15
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer. Trip .................................
Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opener. Garage Door ............................
Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OverheadConsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services .......................
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 I .
2-59
2-59
4-11
6-11
2-45
2-41
2-44
5-13
7-43
8- 12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
Park(P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
2-19
2-24
2-26
Parking
2-14
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
BrakeMechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Lots .......................................
2-14
Over Things That Burn ........................
2-27
4-38
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Power
2-52
Accessory Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
Option Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
6-30
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
5-2
Problems on the Road ............................
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 1. 8- I 2
5- 19
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
3-9
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 16
Rain. Driving In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40
Rear
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
1-37
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
3-18
SeatAudio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11. 5-12
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
2-34
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
5-16
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulator. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Removable Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66
6-68
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-66
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- IO. 8-11
Restraints
1-44
Built-in Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-65
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-41. 1-42.1-43.1-53
1-5
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Systemcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
9-7
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. . . 1-27
8-5
Roadside Assistance ..............................
Roadside Assistance. Canadian .....................
8-7
5-36
Rocking YourVehicle ...........................
6-45
Rotation. Tires .................................
1-65
bafety Belt Extender ............................
1- 12
Safety Belts ...................................
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Care .......................................
6-54
Center Rear Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Children ....................................
1-41
Driver Position ...............................
1- 18
Extender .................................... l-65
How to Wear Properly .........................
1- 18
Incorrect Usage .........................
1-63,1-64
LapBelt ....................................
1-39
Lap-Shoulder ...........................
1- 18, 1-34
1-62
LargerChildren ..............................
1- 17
Questions and Answers ........................
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1-34
Rear Seat Passengers ..........................
1- 13, 2-60
Reminder Light .........................
1-62
Replacing After a Crash ........................
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Smaller Children and Babies, Cargo Vans . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Smaller Children andBabies, Except Cargo Vans . . . . 1-4 1
Use During Pregnancy .........................
1-26
1-13
WhyTheyWork ..............................
Safety Chains ..................................
4-34
Safety Defects. Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10. 8- 11
...
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
111
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
7-4
Seatback
1-5
Latches ......................................
Reclining ....................................
1-4
Seats
ManualFront ............................,.... l-2
1-3
Manual Lumbar Support ........................
Power ...................................... l-3
Rear ........................................
1-6
Removable Rear ...............................
1-9
1-1
Restraint Systems ..............................
Seat Controls .................................
1-2
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53, 1-54
1-2
Two-WayManual .............................
2-21
SecondGear ...................................
Service ........................................
6-2
Bulletins, Ordering .......................
8-1 1, 8-12
EngineSoonLight ............................
2-65
8- 11, 8- 12
Manuals, Ordering .......................
6-60
Parts Identification Label .......................
Publications, Ordering ....................
8- 11, 8- 12
6-2
Work, Doing Your Own .........................
6-1
Service and Appearance Care ......................
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11, 8- 12
Service Publications ........................
8-11, 8-12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-57
Shifting .......................................
2-19
Into Park (P) .................................
2-24
Out of Park (P) ...............................
2-26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
Sound Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
5-35
Spare Tire. Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
6-52
Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-45
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 17
Starting Your Engine ............................
5-13
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- I O
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
2-31
Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
6-36
Storage.Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
2-51
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Symbols. Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Taillamp Bulb Replacement ......................
6-41
Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Temperature & Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
3-26
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
THEFTLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ThirdGear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Time.Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
6-50
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TireLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
6-48
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-35
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Inflation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
6-44
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
9-9
.
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-54
Torque Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
5.32.6.66
Torque. Wheel Nut .........................
4-31
Towing a Trailer ................................
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle .............................
Trailer
4-35
Brakes .....................................
4-37
Driving on Grades ............................
4-35
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-38
Parking on Hills ..............................
4-34
Safety Chains ................................
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-34
Total Weight on Tires ..........................
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
4-32
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Harness ...............................
4-39
6-20
TransmissionFluid.Automatic ....................
Transmitters. Keyless Entry ........................
2-7
Transportation.Courtesy ..........................
8-8
TripOdometer .................................
2-59
TTYUsers ...................................... 8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Turn SignaIMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Two-way ManualSeat ...........................
1-2
9-10
Underbody Maintenance ........................
6-58
Underhood Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
2-53
Universal Transmitter ............................
Vehicle
Control ......................................
DamageWarnings ..............................
Dimensions .................................
IdentificationNumber .........................
Loading ....................................
Storage .....................................
Ventilation System ...............................
VisorVanity Mirrors ............................
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter .....................................
w a r n i n g Devices ...............................
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Information ............................
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................
Washing Your Vehicle ...........................
Weatherstrips ..................................
Wheel
Alignment ..................................
Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32.
Replacement .................................
Wrench .....................................
4-6
iv
6-68
6-60
4-28
6-36
3-6
2-52
2-51
2-62
5-2
2-60
8-10
6-31
6-56
6-55
6-48
6-66
6-48
5-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Express-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Power ....................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Fluid .....................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Rear .....................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2-33
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Wiring. Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
WreckerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
Wrench. Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25
9-11
Service Station Checkpoints
WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
P6-31
ENGINE COOLANT
RECOVERYTANK
P6-27
\
/f!\>
TIRES
P6-43
fi
/
/
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
SECONDARY
HOOD RELEASE
P6-8
BATTERYP6-36
I
HOOD RELEASE
P6-8
FUEL'DOOR
P6-5
For detailed information, refer to the page number listed, or see the index in the back of the owner's manual.
9-12